2011 GMC Yukon/Yukon XL Owner Manual€¦ · GMC Yukon/Yukon XL Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1) iv Introduction Using this Manual To quickly locate information about the vehicle,

Black plate (1,1)GMC Yukon/Yukon XL Owner Manual - 2011

2011 GMC Yukon/Yukon XL Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-47Universal Remote System . . . . 5-55

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9


2011 GMC Yukon/Yukon XL Owner Manual M

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-35Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-28Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-37Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-52Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-58Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-94

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-10

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, and YUKONare trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for GMCwherever it appears in this manual.

If the vehicle is a hybrid, seethe hybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 delangue françaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 25965918 B Second Printing ©2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate informationabout the vehicle, use the Indexin the back of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shownwhen you need to see your ownermanual for additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

0 : Adjustable Pedals

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Heated and VentilatedSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Head RestraintAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Sensing System forPassenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-16Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-22Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-22Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-24Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Universal Remote System . . . 1-25Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Performance and MaintenanceStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-26Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-26Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-27Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-27Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview

United States Version Shown; Canada Similar


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑13.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑5.

Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5.

C. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑12.

D. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑5 (Out of View).

E. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑37.

F. Manual Mode on page 9‑41(If Equipped).

Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑42(If Equipped).

G. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑28.

H. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

I. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

J. Dome Lamps on page 6‑8.

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑7.

Fog Lamps on page 6‑6(If Equipped).

K. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

L. Integrated Trailer BrakeController (If Equipped). SeeTowing Equipment onpage 9‑84.

M. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑21.

N. Automatic Transfer CaseControl. (If Equipped). SeeFour-Wheel Drive (Two SpeedAutomatic Transfer Case) onpage 9‑43 or Four-Wheel Drive(Single Speed AutomaticTransfer Case) on page 9‑48.

O. Cruise Control on page 9‑56.

P. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

Q. Horn on page 5‑4.

R. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

S. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 (If Equipped).

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑4(If Equipped).

T. Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

U. StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑52 (If Equipped).

Pedal Adjust Button(If Equipped). See AdjustableThrottle and Brake Pedal onpage 9‑28.

Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑58 (If Equipped).

Power Assist Steps onpage 2‑14 (If Equipped).

V. Glove Box on page 4‑1.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press K again within three secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback canbe personalized. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑47.

m : Press and hold to unlock theliftglass.

& : Press and hold to open orclose the power liftgate.

L : Press and release to locatethe vehicle.

PressL and hold for more thantwo seconds to sound the panicalarm.

PressL again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System onpage 2‑2.


In Brief 1-5

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at

the vehicle and press andhold/ until the parking lampsturn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5.

Door LocksThere are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe key in the driver door. Frominside, use the power door locks orthe manual door locks. To lock orunlock the door with the manuallocks, push down or pull up on themanual lock knob.

Power Door Locks

If available, these switches are onthe front doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Door Locks on page 2‑8.


1-6 In Brief

Liftgate

Power Liftgate

Press K on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or use thepower door lock switches to unlockthe liftgate.

There are several ways to open andclose the power liftgate:

. Press and hold& on the RKEtransmitter until the liftgate startsmoving.

. Press& on the overheadconsole inside the vehicle.

. Press the touchpad switch (B) onthe outside liftgate handleto open.

. Press thel button next to theliftgate latch to close.

To disable the power liftgatefunction, press OFF on theoverhead console.

Liftglass

There are two ways to unlatch theliftglass:. Press the button on the

underside of the license plateapplique (A).

. Pressm on the RKEtransmitter.

See Liftgate (Manual) on page 2‑10or Liftgate (Power) on page 2‑11.

Windows

The power window switches arelocated on the driver door. Inaddition, each passenger doorhas a switch for its own window.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

For more information, see:. Windows on page 2‑21.. Power Windows on page 2‑22.


In Brief 1-7

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3for more information.

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. If available, raise or lower thefront or rear part of the seatcushion by moving the front orrear of the control up or down.

. If available, raise or lower theentire seat by moving the entirecontrol up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4 for more information.

Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

If equipped, increase or decreasemanual lumbar support by turningthe knob forward or rearward.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑6 for more information.


1-8 In Brief

Power Lumbar

To adjust the power lumbar support,if equipped:. On vehicles with two-way

lumbar, press and hold the topor bottom of the control toincrease or decrease lumbarsupport.

. On vehicles with four-waylumbar, press and hold the frontor rear of the control to increaseor decrease lumbar support.To raise or lower the height ofthe support, press and hold thetop or bottom of the control.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑6 for more information.

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.


In Brief 1-9

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑7 for more information.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑7 for more information.

Memory Features

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the controls on the driverdoor are used to program and recallmemory settings for the driver seat,outside mirrors, and the adjustablethrottle and brake pedals, if thevehicle has this feature.


1-10 In Brief

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat andseatback recliner, both outsidemirrors, and the throttle andbrake pedals, if available.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑18and Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal on page 9‑28 formore information.

Not all mirrors and adjustablethrottles and brake pedals willhave the ability to save andrecall their positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall, press and release “1”or “2.” The vehicle must be inP (Park). A single beep will sound.The seat, outside mirrors, andadjustable throttle and brake pedals,if available, will move to the positionpreviously stored for the identifieddriver.

See “Memory Seat, Mirrors,and Pedals” under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4 and VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑47 for more information.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature can move the seatrearward to allow extra room to exitthe vehicle.

B : Press to recall the easy exitseat position. The vehicle must bein P (Park).

See “Memory Seat, Mirrors,and Pedals” under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4 and VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑47 for more information.

Second Row SeatsOn vehicles with a 60/40 split benchor buckets seats, the seatbacks canbe folded for additional cargo space,or the seats can be folded andtumbled for easy entry/exit to thethird row seats, if equipped. Onvehicles with bucket seats, theseatbacks also recline.

See Second Row Seats onpage 3‑12 for more information.

Third Row SeatsOn vehicles with third row seats, theseatbacks can be folded, and theentire seat can be tumbled orremoved from the vehicle.

For detailed instructions, see ThirdRow Seats on page 3‑17.


In Brief 1-11

Heated Seats

Front Seats

If available, the buttons are on thefront doors.

I : Press to heat theseatback only.

J : Press to heat the seat andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each pressof the button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,

and then to the off setting. Thelights indicate three for the highestsetting and one for the lowest.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑9.

Rear Seats

If available, the buttons are on theRear Sear Audio (RSA) panel on therear of the center console.

Press M or L to heat the leftoutboard or right outboard seatcushion and to cycle through thetemperature settings.

See Heated Rear Seats onpage 3‑12.

Heated and VentilatedSeats


H : Press to cool the seat.

I : Press to heat theseatback only.

J : Press to heat the seat andseatback.


1-12 In Brief

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting and onefor the lowest.

See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3‑10.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and thehead restraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑21.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑25.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑30.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑62.

Sensing System forPassenger AirbagThe passenger sensing system,if equipped, will turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. The driverairbags, seat‐mounted side impactairbags (if equipped), and roof‐railairbags are not affected by this.

If the vehicle has one of theindicators pictured in the followingillustrations, then the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position.

The passenger airbag statusindicator, if equipped, will be visibleon the overhead console when thevehicle is started.


In Brief 1-13

United States

Canada

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑47 for important information.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Vehicles with manual outsidemirrors can be adjusted so that theside of the vehicle and the areabehind are seen.

See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑17

If the vehicle has towing mirrors,they can be adjusted for a clearerview of the objects behind you.Manually pull out the mirror head toextend it for better visibility whentowing a trailer. See Trailer-TowMirrors on page 2‑17.

Power Mirrors

Vehicles with outside power mirrorsand foldaway mirrors have controlslocated on the driver door.

1. Press (A) or (B) to selectthe driver or passenger sidemirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right, or left.

3. Press either (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑18.

Power Foldaway Mirrors

To fold the mirrors:

1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

The mirrors may also include amemory function that works with thememory seats. See “Memory Seat,Mirrors, and Pedals” in Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4 for moreinformation.

Manual Foldaway Mirrors

Manually fold the mirrors inwardto prevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.


1-14 In Brief

To fold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn to its original position.

See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑19.

Interior Mirrors

Vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror can be adjusted to see clearlybehind the vehicle. Hold the mirrorin the center to move it up or downand side to side. Adjust the mirrorto avoid glare from the headlampsbehind you. Push the tab forwardfor daytime use and pull it fornighttime use.

Vehicles with the automatic dimmingfeature will automatically reduceglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight illuminates each time thevehicle is started.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑20 for moreinformation.

Steering WheelAdjustment

The tilt lever is located on the lowerleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thewheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustmentOn vehicles with this feature, youcan change the position of thethrottle and brake pedals.

The control used to adjust thepedals is located on the instrumentpanel below the climate controlsystem.

Press the bottom of the control tomove the pedals closer to yourbody. Press the top of the control tomove the pedals away.

See Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal on page 9‑28.


In Brief 1-15

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps are located in theoverhead console.

They come on when any door isopened and turn off after all thedoors are closed.

Turn the instrument panelbrightness knob located belowthe dome lamp override button,clockwise to the farthest position tomanually turn on the dome lamps.The dome lamps remain on until theknob is turned counterclockwise.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button islocated next to the exterior lampscontrol.

k : Press the button in and thedome lamps remain off when a dooris opened. Press the button again toreturn it to the extended position sothat the dome lamps come on whena door is opened.

Reading Lamps

For vehicles with reading lamps inthe overhead console, press thebutton located next to the lamp toturn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. To turn thelamps on or off, press the buttonlocated next to the lamp.

For more information about interiorlamps, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6‑8.. Reading Lamps on page 6‑8.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑7.


1-16 In Brief

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.

O : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to the off position again toturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position will only work whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

AUTO: Automatically turns onthe headlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,roof marker lamps (if equipped) andlicense plate lamps.

; : Turns on the parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,roof marker lamps (if equipped) andlicense plate lamps.

5 : Turns on the headlamps,parking lamps, taillamps, instrumentpanel lights, roof marker lamps (ifequipped) and license plate lamps.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑3.. Fog Lamps on page 6‑6.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

8 : Single wipe, turn to8, thenrelease. Several wipes, hold theband on8 longer.

9 : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

6 : Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

6 : Slow wipes.

? : Fast wipes.

L : Push this paddle to spraywasher fluid on the windshield.


In Brief 1-17

Rear Wiper Window Wiper/Washer

To turn the rear wiper on, slide thelever to a wiper position.

9 : Turns the wiper off.

5 : Turns on the rear wiper delay.

Z : Turns on the rear wiper.

= : Press the button on the end ofthe lever to spray washer fluid onthe rear window.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5 and Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5‑5.

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthese systems.

If this vehicle is a Hybrid, see the hybrid supplement for more information.

A. Fan Control

B. REAR (Rear Climate Control)

C. Air Recirculation

D. Air Delivery Mode Control

E. Air Conditioning

F. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

G. Rear Window Defogger

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.


1-18 In Brief

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

C. Defrost

D. Air Recirculation

E. REAR (Rear Climate Control)

F. Air Delivery Mode Control

G. Driver Temperature Control

H. Display

I. Power Button

J. Rear Window Defogger

K. Air Conditioning

L. PASS

M. Passenger Temperature Control

See Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8‑4. Forvehicles with rear heating and airconditioning controls, see RearClimate Control System (RearClimate Control Only) on page 8‑10or Rear Climate Control System(Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio)on page 8‑11.

Transmission

Range Selection Mode

Base Trim Shown (Uplevel Similar)

The Range Selection Mode switchis located on the shift lever. Toenable the Range Selection feature,move the column shift lever to theM (Manual) position. The currentrange will appear next to the M. Thisis the highest attainable range withall lower gears accessible. As anexample, when 5 (Fifth) gear isselected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth)gears are available.


In Brief 1-19

Press the plus/minus buttons,located on the steering column shiftlever, to select the desired range ofgears for current driving conditions.See Manual Mode on page 9‑41.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/Haulmode can be used.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑42.

Four-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive,you can send the engine's drivingpower to all four wheels for extratraction.

Automatic Transfer Case

Two Speed Transfer Case

Single Speed Transfer Case

The transfer case knob is locatedto the left of the instrument panelcluster. Use this knob to shift intoand out of the different Four-WheelDrive modes.

2 m : This setting is used for drivingin most street and highwaysituations.

AUTO: This setting is ideal foruse when road surface tractionconditions are variable.

4 m : Use the Four-Wheel-DriveHigh position when extra traction isneeded, such as on snowy or icyroads or in most off-road situations.

4 n : Vehicles with atwo speed transfer case have aFour-Wheel-Drive Low position.This setting sends maximum powerto all four wheels. You might chooseFour-Wheel-Drive Low if you aredriving off-road in deep sand, deepmud, deep snow, and while climbingor descending steep hills.


1-20 In Brief

N (Neutral): Vehicles with atwo speed transfer case havea N (Neutral) position. Shift thetransfer case to N (Neutral) onlywhen towing the vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑93 or Towing the Vehicleon page 10‑93.

See Four-Wheel Drive (Two SpeedAutomatic Transfer Case) onpage 9‑43 or Four-Wheel Drive(Single Speed Automatic TransferCase) on page 9‑48.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3)

O : Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.

f : Select radio stations.

© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.


In Brief 1-21

4 : Press to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition isoff, press this button to display thetime. Press to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS or XM station; or CD,MP3, or WMA song. If informationis available during XM, CD, MP3,or WMA playback, the song titleinformation displays on the top lineof the display and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7‑3.

For vehicles with a Rear SeatEntertainment System (RSE) andRear Seat Audio System (RSA), seeRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑35 and RearSeat Audio (RSA) System onpage 7‑45 for more information.

Storing Radio Stations

A maximum of 36 stations canbe stored as favorites using thesix softkeys located below the radiostation frequency tabs and by usingthe radio FAV button. Press FAVto go through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

For more information, see “StoringRadio Stations” in AM-FM Radio onpage 7‑7.

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date for theradio with CD, DVD, and USB Port:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, thenpress O, to turn the radio on.

2. Press H to display HR, MIN,MM, DD, and YYYY (hour,minute, month, day, and year).

3. Press the softkey located underany one of the labels to bechanged.

4. To increase or decrease the timeor date, turn f clockwise orcounter‐clockwise.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for the vehicle's specificaudio system, see Clock onpage 5‑8.


1-22 In Brief

Satellite RadioXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.XM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theXM service.

For more information, refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑8.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle has an auxiliary input,located on the audio faceplate,and a USB port located on theinstrument panel or in the centerconsole. External devices suchas iPod®, laptop computers,

MP3 players, CD changers, USBstorage device, etc. can beconnected to the auxiliary port usinga 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or theUSB port depending on the audiosystem.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑30for further information.

Bluetooth®

For vehicles with a Bluetoothsystem, it allows users with aBluetooth‐enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.

For more information, see Bluetoothon page 7‑47.

Steering Wheel Controls

If available, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w /cx : Press to select presetor favorite radio stations, selecttracks on a CD/DVD, or to navigatean iPod or USB device.


In Brief 1-23

b g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withOnStar® or Bluetooth systems,if equipped.

+ e − e : Press to increase ordecrease volume.

cx : Press to reject anincoming call, or to end a call.

SRCE: Press to switch betweenthe radio and CD, and for equippedvehicles, the DVD, front auxiliary,and rear auxiliary.

¨ : Press to seek the next radiostation, the next track or chapterwhile sourced to the CD or DVDslot, or to select tracks and folderson an iPod or USB device.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

Cruise Control

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the left side of thesteering wheel.

T : Press to turn the system onor off. The indicator light is on whencruise control is on and turns offwhen cruise control is off.

+ RES: Press briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previouslyset speed, or press and hold toaccelerate.

SET − : Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or make thevehicle decelerate.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑56.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, there is a separateNavigation System Manual thatincludes information on the radio,audio players, and navigationsystem.


1-24 In Brief

The navigation system providesdetailed maps of most majorfreeways and roads. After adestination has been set, thesystem provides turn-by-turninstructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of pointsof interest (POIs), such as banks,airports, restaurants, and more.

See the Navigation System Manualfor more information.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If available, this feature will alert youto vehicles located in the vehicle'sside blind zone. When the systemdetects a vehicle in the side blindzone, an amber SBZA display willlight up in the corresponding outsideside mirror.

The system is enabled at everyvehicle startup. It can be disabledthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

If the message SIDE BLIND ZONESYSTEM UNAVAILABLE appearson the DIC, the system has beendisabled because the sensor isblocked and cannot detect vehiclesin the blind zone. The sensor maybe blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,slush, or even heavy rainstorms.This message may also activateduring heavy rain or due to roadspray. The vehicle does not needservice.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)on page 9‑60 for more information.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If available, the rear vision cameradisplays a view of the area behindthe vehicle when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse). Thedisplay will appear on either theinside rearview mirror or navigationscreen, if equipped.

To clean the camera lens, locatedabove the license plate, rinse it withwater and wipe it with a soft cloth.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9‑63.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) uses sensors on therear bumper to detect objects whileparking the vehicle. URPA comeson automatically when the shift leveris moved into R (Reverse) andoperates at speeds less than 8 km/h(5 mph). URPA uses audio beepsto provide distance and systeminformation.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

The system can be disabled bypressing the rear park aid disablebutton located next to the radio.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑58 for more information.


In Brief 1-25

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There are two under the climatecontrols, one inside the center floorconsole, one on the rear of thecenter floor console and oneaccessory power outlet in the rearcargo area on the passenger side.

The accessory power outlets arepowered, even with the ignitionoff. Continuing to use accessorypower outlets while the ignition is inLOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle'sbattery to run down.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

Universal Remote System

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program thetransmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful tohave another person assist withprogramming the transmitter.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5‑55.

Sunroof

There are two sunroof switches onthe overhead console above therearview mirror.

To open or close the sunroof, pressthe open or close switch (A) to thefirst detent position.


1-26 In Brief

To express open or close thesunroof, press the open or closeswitch (A) to the second detentposition and release. To stop themovement, press the switch again.

To automatically vent or close thesunroof, press the vent open orclose switch (B).

The sunroof also has a sunshadethat you can pull forward to blockthe rays of the sun. The sunshademust be opened and closedmanually.

See Sunroof on page 2‑23.

Performance andMaintenance

StabiliTrak® SystemIf equipped, the vehicle has atraction control system that limitswheel spin and the StabiliTraksystem that assists with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. Both systemsturn on automatically every time thevehicle is started.. To turn off traction control,

press and release 5 on the

instrument panel. F illuminatesand the appropriate DICmessage displays. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑43.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press andhold 5 until F illuminates andthe appropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑43.

. Press and release 5 again toturn on both systems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑52.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑23. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.


In Brief 1-27

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑58.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand, on most vehicles, displays aDIC message when it is necessaryto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

To reset the Engine Oil Life Systemon most vehicles:

1. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC. If the vehicle doesnot have DIC buttons, thevehicle must be in P (Park) toaccess this display.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC,or the trip odometer resetstem if the vehicle does nothave DIC buttons, for more thanfive seconds. The oil life willchange to 100%.

On all vehicles, the Engine Oil LifeSystem can be reset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press the acceleratorpedal slowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC. If the displayshows 100%, the system isreset.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑70. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑68.


1-28 In Brief

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-GMC-8782(1‐800‐462-8782)

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new GMC, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑6 for more information.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location willbe sent to an OnStar advisor whowill assess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.gmcownercenter.com (U.S.)or www.gm.ca (Canada).


In Brief 1-29

OnStar®

OnStar uses several innovativetechnologies and live Advisors toprovide a wide range of safety,security, navigation, diagnostics,and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built‐in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStarAdvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to see ifyou need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : This blue button connectsyou to a specially trained OnStarAdvisor to verify your accountinformation and to answerquestions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar EmergencyAdvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation.

Crisis Assist, Stolen VehicleAssistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,Remote Door Unlock, RoadsideAssistance, Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation, and Hands‐Free Callingare available on most vehicles.Not all OnStar services areavailable on all vehicles. For moreinformation see the OnStar Owner'sGuide or visit www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080, or pushQ tospeak with an OnStar Advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar GloveBox Kit.

OnStar service requires wirelesscommunication networks and theGlobal Positioning System (GPS)satellite network. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles at all times.

OnStar service can’t workunless your vehicle is in a placewhere OnStar has an agreementwith a wireless service providerfor service in that area, and thewireless service provider hascoverage, network capacity,reception, and technologycompatible with OnStar service.


1-30 In Brief

Service involving locationinformation about your vehiclecan’t work unless GPS signalsare available, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. The vehicle has to havea working electrical system andadequate battery power for theOnStar equipment to operate.OnStar service may not work if theOnStar equipment isn’t properlyinstalled or you haven’t maintainedit and your vehicle is in goodworking order and in compliancewith all government regulations.If you try to add, connect, or modifyany equipment or software in yourvehicle, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems OnStar can’tcontrol may prevent service to you,such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather, electrical system designand architecture of your vehicle,damage to important parts of yourvehicle in a crash, or wireless phonenetwork congestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may have ab g /cx Talk/Mute buttonthat can be used to interact withOnStar Hands-Free Calling. SeeSteering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 for more information.

On some vehicles, the mute buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radioif the OnStar Advisor cannot beheard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system maynot be functioning properly.PushQ and request a vehiclediagnostic check. If the lightappears clear (no light isappearing), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.PushQ to confirm that the OnStarequipment is active.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash-like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar Glove Box Kit,at www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypushingQ and speaking to anAdvisor.


Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-9Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

DoorsLiftgate (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Liftgate (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-16

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-20Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-20Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23


2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If you are locked out of the vehicle,call the Roadside AssistanceCenter. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑6.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too farfrom the vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.



. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.

With Remote Start and Liftglass

With Remote Start and PowerLiftgate and Liftglass

The following functions may beavailable if your vehicle has theRKE system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press tostart the engine from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 for additional information.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the turnsignal lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn chirpswhen the lock button is pressedagain within three seconds. SeeVehicle Personalization (With DICButtons) on page 5‑47 for additionalinformation.

Pressing Q arms the contenttheft‐deterrent system. SeeAnti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑14.



K (Unlock): Press once to unlockonly the driver door. If K is pressedagain within three seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps may come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.

If enabled through the DIC, the turnsignal lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑47. If enabled throughthe DIC, the exterior lights turn onbriefly if it is dark enough outside.See “Approach Lighting” underVehicle Personalization (With DICButtons) on page 5‑47.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft‐deterrentsystem. See Anti-Theft AlarmSystem on page 2‑14.

m (Liftglass): Press and hold tounlock the liftglass.

& (Power Liftgate): Press andhold to open and close the liftgate.The taillamps flash and a chimesounds to indicate when the liftgateis opening and closing.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is moved toON/RUN or L is pressed again.The ignition must be in LOCK/OFFfor the panic alarm to work.

The vehicle comes with twotransmitters. Each transmitter willhave a number on it, “1” or “2”.These numbers correspond tothe driver of the vehicle. Forexample, the memory seat position

for driver 1 will be recalled whenusing the transmitter labeled “1”,if enabled through the DIC.See “Memory Seat, Mirrors,and Pedals” under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4 and VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑47 for more information.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitteris programmed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must alsobe reprogrammed. Any lost orstolen transmitters will no longerwork once the new transmitter isprogrammed. The vehicle can havea maximum of eight transmittersprogrammed to it. See your dealerto program transmitters to thevehicle.



Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if theREPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTEKEY message displays in the DIC.See “REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY” under Key andLock Messages on page 5‑42 foradditional information.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter. To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a flathead screwdriver.. Carefully insert the tool

into the notch locatedalong the parting line of thetransmitter. Do not insertthe tool too far. Stop assoon as resistance is felt.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartIf available, this feature allows youto start the engine from outside ofthe vehicle. It may also start up thevehicle's heating or air conditioningsystems and rear window defogger.Normal operation of the system willreturn after the key is turned to theON/RUN position.

If the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system, the climatecontrol system will default to aheating or cooling mode dependingon the outside temperatures. If thevehicle does not have an automaticclimate control system, the systemwill turn on at the setting the vehiclewas set to when the vehicle waslast turned off.



During a remote start, if the vehiclehas an automatic climate controlsystem and heated seats, theheated seats will turn on duringcolder outside temperatures and willshut off when the key is turned toON/RUN. If the vehicle does nothave an automatic climate controlsystem, during remote start,manually turn the heated seats onand off. See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑9 for additional information.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remotestart to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.

If the vehicle has the remotestart feature, the RKE transmitterfunctions will have an increasedrange of operation. However, therange may be less while the vehicleis running.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 foradditional information.

/ (Remote Start): This buttonwill be on the RKE transmitter if thevehicle has remote start.

To start the vehicle using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q. Thevehicle's doors will lock.Immediately press andhold/ until the turn signallamps flash. If you cannot seethe vehicle's lamps, press andhold/ for two to four seconds.

Pressing/ again after thevehicle has started will turn theengine off.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on andremain on while the vehicle isrunning.

If the vehicle is left running,it will automatically shut offafter 10 minutes unless a timeextension has been done.

3. If it is the first remote startsince the vehicle has beendriven, repeat these steps,while the engine is still running,to extend the engine runningtime by 10 minutes. Remote startcan be extended one time.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.



To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at

the vehicle and press andhold/ until the parking lampsturn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

The vehicle can be remote startedtwo separate times between drivingsequences. The engine will run for10 minutes after each remote start.

Or, you can extend the engine runtime by another 10 minutes withinthe first 10 minute remote start timeframe, and before the engine stops.

For example, if Q and then/ arepressed again after the vehiclehas been running for 5 minutes,10 minutes are added, allowing theengine to run for 15 minutes.

The additional 10 minutes areconsidered a second remote vehiclestart.

Once two remote starts, or a singleremote start with one time extensionhas been done, the vehicle must bestarted with the key. After the keyis removed from the ignition, thevehicle can be remote started again.

The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if the key is in the ignition,the hood is not closed, or if thereis an emission control systemmalfunction and the check enginelight is on.

Also, the engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if the coolanttemperature gets too high or if theoil pressure gets low.

Remote Start Ready

If the vehicle does not have theremote vehicle start feature, it mayhave the remote start ready feature.This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer's remotevehicle start feature.

See your dealer to add themanufacturer's remote vehicle startfeature to the vehicle.



Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a dooris locked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle ina crash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So,all passengers should wearsafety belts properly andthe doors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe key in the driver door.

From inside, use the power doorlocks or manual door locks. To lockor unlock the door with the manuallocks, push down or pull up on themanual lock knob.

Power Door LocksWith power door locks, the switcheson the front doors can be used tolock and unlock the vehicle.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.



Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door or theliftgate is open, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice will override the delayedlocking feature and immediately lockall the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

You can program this feature usingthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Delay Door Lock” underVehicle Personalization (With DICButtons) on page 5‑47.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle may have an automaticlock/unlock feature. This featurecan be programmed using theDriver Information Center (DIC).

See Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5‑47 for moreinformation on DIC programming.

Lockout ProtectionIf the driver side power door lockswitch is pressed when the driverdoor is open and the key is in theignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.

If the passenger side power doorlock switch is pressed when thefront passenger door is open andthe key is in the ignition, all of thedoors will lock and then the frontpassenger door will unlock.

Safety LocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge ofeach door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot to thevertical position.



Doors

Liftgate (Manual)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to drivewith the liftglass or liftgate openbecause carbon monoxide (CO)gas can come into your vehicle.You cannot see or smell CO.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death.

If you must drive with theliftglass or liftgate open, or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass throughthe seal between the body andthe liftglass or liftgate:

. Make sure all other windowsare shut.

. Turn the fan on your heatingor cooling system to itshighest speed with the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

recirculation mode off. Thatwill force outside air into yourvehicle. See Climate ControlSystems on page 8‑1 or DualAutomatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑4.

. If you have air outlets on orunder the instrument panel,open them all the way.

. If your vehicle has a powerliftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑36.

Press K on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or use thepower door lock switches to unlockthe liftgate. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3.

On vehicles with a liftglass, pressthe button on the underside of thelicense pocket applique (A) to openit. The liftglass can also be openedby pressingm on the RKEtransmitter.

To open the entire liftgate, press thetouchpad on the underside of theliftgate handle (B). The vehicle mustbe in PARK (P) to open the liftgate.To close the liftgate, use the pullcup or pull strap.



The liftgate or liftglass cannot beopened if the rear wipers are inmotion. Attempting to open theliftgate or liftglass while the rearwipers are in motion will cause therelease of the liftglass or liftgate todelay until the wipers are moved offthe liftglass.

Both the liftglass and liftgate havean electric latch. If the battery isdisconnected or has low voltage,the liftglass and liftgate will notopen. The liftglass and liftgate willresume operation when the batteryis reconnected and charged.

Liftgate (Power)

Power Liftgate Operation

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑36.

On vehicles with a power liftgate thebutton is on the overhead console.

The vehicle must be in P (Park) touse the power liftgate feature.

& : Press the top of the button toopen or close the power liftgate.

OFF: Press the bottom of thebutton for manual operation of thepower liftgate.



The taillamps will flash and a chimewill sound when the power liftgate ismoving.

{ WARNING

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.

The power liftgate can be poweropened and closed in thefollowing ways:

. Press and hold& on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter until the liftgate startsmoving. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operationon page 2‑3.

. Press& on the overheadconsole.

. Press the touchpad on theoutside liftgate handle.

Pressing the buttons, or touchpadswitch a second time while theliftgate is moving reverses thedirection.

l : The liftgate can also beclosed by pressing this button nextto the liftgate latch.

Press the button a second timeduring liftgate operation to reversethat operation.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures, or under low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan still be operated manually.

If the transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power functionis in progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.If the transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) and the vehicle acceleratesbefore the power liftgate latchesclosed, the liftgate may reverse tothe open position. Cargo could fallout of the vehicle. Always makesure the power liftgate is closed andlatched before you drive away.

If you power open the liftgate andthe liftgate support struts have lostpressure, the lamps will flash and achime will sound. The liftgate willstay open temporarily, then slowlyclose. See your dealer for servicebefore using the liftgate.



Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,a warning chime will sound and theliftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed or openposition. After removing theobstruction, the power liftgateoperation can be used again.If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivate,and you must manually open orclose the liftgate. The REARACCESS OPEN warning messagein the Driver Information Center(DIC) will indicate that the liftgateis open. After removing theobstructions, manually open theliftgate to the full open position orclose the liftgate to the fully closedand latched position. The liftgatewill now resume normal poweroperation.

Pinch sensors are located on thesides of the liftgate. If an object iscaught between the liftgate andthe body and presses against thissensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and open fully. The liftgatewill remain open until it is activatedagain or closed manually. Do notforce the liftgate open or closedduring a power cycle.

Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, press the switch on theoverhead console to the OFFposition.

With the power liftgate disabledand all of the doors unlocked, theliftgate can be manually opened andclosed.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the handle on theoutside of the liftgate, and lift thegate open. To close the liftgate, usethe pull cup to lower the liftgate and

close. The liftgate latch will powerclose. Always close the liftgatebefore driving.

If the RKE button or the power closebutton on the liftgate is pressedwhile power operation is disabled,the lamps will flash three times, butthe liftgate will not move.

It is not recommended that youdrive with the liftgate open,however, if you must drive with theliftgate open, the liftgate should beset to manual operation by pressingthe OFF switch on the centerconsole.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected orhas low voltage, the liftgate willnot open. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connectedwith adequate voltage, the switch isnot disabled, and the liftgate still willnot function, your vehicle should betaken to a dealer for service.



Power Assist StepsThe vehicle may have power assiststeps.

The switch used to disable thepower assist steps is located on thecenter console below the climatecontrol system.

The power assist stepsautomatically extend from beneaththe vehicle on the side in which thedoor has been opened. Once thedoor is closed, the assist stepsautomatically move back underthe vehicle after a brief delay. Thevehicle must not be moving for theassist steps to extend or retract.

The assist steps cannot be disabledin the extended position.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemYour vehicle has a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

This is the security light.

To arm the theft-deterrent system:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitteror the power door lock switch.The security light will come on toinform the driver the system is

arming. If a door is open whenthe doors are locked, thesecurity light will flash.

If the delayed locking feature isturned on, the theft‐deterrentsystem will not start the armingprocess until the last door isclosed and the delay timer hasexpired. See Delayed Lockingon page 2‑9.

3. Close all doors. The securitylight should go off after about30 seconds. The alarm is notarmed until the security lightgoes off.

If a locked driver door is openedwithout using the RKE transmitter,a 10-second pre-alarm will occur.The horn will chirp and the lightswill flash. If the key is not placed inthe ignition and turned to START orthe door is not unlocked by pressingthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will go off.



Your vehicle's headlamps will flashand the horn will sound for about30 seconds, then will turn off to savethe battery power.

The theft-deterrent system will notactivate if the doors are locked withthe vehicle's key or the manual doorlock. It activates only if you use thepower door lock switch with the dooropen or the RKE transmitter. Youshould also remember that you canstart your vehicle with the correctignition key if the alarm has beenset off.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. If you do not want to activate

the theft-deterrent system, thevehicle should be locked withthe door key after the doors areclosed.

. Always unlock the doors with theRKE transmitter. Unlocking adoor any other way will set offthe alarm if it is armed.

If you set off the alarm by accident,press unlock on the RKE transmitteror place the key in the ignition andturn it to START to turn off thealarm. The alarm will not stop if youtry to unlock a door any other way.

Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lowerthe driver window and open thedriver door.

2. Activate the system by lockingthe doors with the power doorlock switch while the dooris open, or with the RKEtransmitter.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close thedoor and wait for the securitylight to go out.

4. Then reach in through thewindow, unlock the door withthe manual door lock and openthe door. This should set off thealarm.

While the alarm is set, the powerdoor unlock switch will not work.

If the alarm does not sound whenit should but the headlamps flash,check to see if the horn works. Thehorn fuse may be blown. To replacethe fuse, see Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑40.

If the alarm does not sound or theheadlamps do not flash, the vehicleshould be serviced by your dealer.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.



Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turnedto ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or START from the LOCK/OFFposition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light will come on ifthere is a problem with armingor disarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key III+ systemsenses that someone is using thewrong key, it prevents the vehiclefrom starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the

vehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical keycodes.

If the engine does not start andthe security light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when tryingto start the vehicle, there may bea problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. Turn the ignition off and tryagain.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. At this time,you may also want to check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑40. If theengine still does not start with theother key, the vehicle needs service.If the vehicle does start, the first keymay be faulty. See your dealer whocan service the PASS-Key III+ tohave a new key made.

It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.

Up to 10 keys may be programmedfor the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all thecurrently programmed keys arelost or do not operate, you mustsee your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to havekeys made and programmed to thesystem.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank cut exactly as theignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key hasa 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand start the engine. If theengine will not start, see yourdealer for service.

3. After the engine has started,turn the key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.



4. Insert the new key to beprogrammed and turn it tothe ON/RUN position withinfive seconds of turning theignition to the LOCK/OFFposition in Step 3.

The security light will turnoff once the key has beenprogrammed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

If you lose or damage yourPASS-Key III+ key, see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Manual MirrorsAdjust the outside mirrors for aclearer view.

Using hood-mounted air deflectorsand add-on convex mirrorattachments could decrease mirrorperformance.

Trailer-Tow Mirrors

If the vehicle has towing mirrors,they can be adjusted for a clearerview of the objects behind you.Manually pull out the mirror head toextend it for better visibility whentowing a trailer.



The lower portion of the mirror isconvex. A convex mirror's surface iscurved to see more from the driverseat. The convex mirror can beadjusted manually to the driverpreferred position for better vision.

The mirror may have a turn signalarrow that flashes in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Power Mirrors

Vehicles with outside power mirrorshave the controls on the driver doorarmrest.

To adjust each mirror:

1. Press (A) or (B) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right, or left.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle and thearea behind it can be seen.

4. Press either (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.

The mirrors may also include amemory function that works with thememory seats. See “Memory Seat,Mirrors, and Pedals” under PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑4 formore information.



Folding Mirrors

Vehicles with outside powerfoldaway mirrors have the controlslocated on the driver door armrest.

Power Foldaway

1. Press (A) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (B) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrors

Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:. The mirrors are accidentally

obstructed while folding.. They are accidentally manually

folded/unfolded.. The mirrors will not stay in the

unfolded position.. The mirrors shake and flutter at

normal driving speeds.

Fold and unfold them one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.

Manual Foldaway

Manually fold the mirrors inwardto prevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, push the mirrors toward thevehicle. Push the mirrors outward,to return to its original position.

Turn Signal Indicator

The vehicle may have a turn signalindicator on the mirror. An arrow onthe mirror flashes in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Ground Illumination Lamps

The mirrors may also includeground illumination lamps in thebase of the mirror. These lampshelp to see the area near thebase of the front doors when it isdark out.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑4 or ClimateControl Systems on page 8‑1 formore information.



Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system, seeSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) onpage 9‑60.

Automatic DimmingMirrorVehicles with the dimming featurehave a driver outside mirror thatadjusts for the glare of headlampsbehind you. See Manual RearviewMirror on page 2‑20 for moreinformation.

Park Tilt MirrorsVehicles with the memory packagehave a passenger and/or drivermirror that tilts to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This feature lets thedriver view the curb when parallelparking. The mirror(s) return to theoriginal position when the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse), or theignition is turned off.

Turn this feature on or off throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5‑47 for moreinformation.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the mirror in the center tomove it for a clearer view of behindyour vehicle. Adjust the mirror toavoid glare from the headlampsbehind you. Push the tab at thebottom of the mirror forward fordaytime use and pull it fornighttime use.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.

Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight illuminates each time theignition is turned to start.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.



The vehicle may also have a RearVision Camera (RVC). See RearVision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑63for more information.

If the vehicle has RVC, the O buttonfor turning the dimming feature on oroff will not be available.

Vehicles with OnStar have threeadditional control buttons for theOnStar system. See your dealerfor more information about OnStarand how to subscribe to it. See theOnStar Owner Guide for moreinformation about the servicesOnStar provides.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helplessadults, or pets in a vehiclewith the windows closed isdangerous. They can beovercome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).



Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

The power window controls arelocated on each of the side doors.

The driver door also has switchesthat control the passenger and rearwindows. The power windows workwhen the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑33.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull up the front of theswitch to raise the window.

Express Down Windows

Windows that have theexpress‐down feature allowthe windows to be loweredwithout holding the switch. Pressthe window switch fully and releaseit to activate the express‐downfeature. The express mode canbe canceled at any time by brieflypressing, or pulling the switch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): Thewindow lockout switch is on thedriver door. This feature preventsthe rear passenger windows fromoperating, except from the driverposition. Press the switch to turnthe lockout feature on or off. Anindicator light shows the featureis on.



Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.

Roof

Sunroof

A. Open or Close Sunroof

B. Vent

On vehicles with a sunroof, thereare two sunroof switches on theoverhead console above therearview mirror.

The sunroof only operates whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑33 for more information.

To open or close the sunroof, pressthe open or close switch (A) to thefirst detent position.

To express open or close thesunroof, press the open or closeswitch (A) to the second detentposition and release. To stop themovement, press the switch again.

The sunroof has a comfort stopfeature which stops the sunroof fromopening to the full-open position.From the comfort stop position,press the open or close switch (A) asecond time to open the sunroof tothe full-open position.

To automatically vent or close thesunroof, press the vent open orclose switch (B).



When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation, noise, or pluggingthe water drainage system.

Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Rear SeatsHeated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-37Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-37Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-41When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-52

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-53Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-53

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-58Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-60Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-69

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-69

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe front seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up to raiseit. To lower the head restraint,press the button, located on thetop of the seatback, and push therestraint down.



Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The head restraints are notdesigned to be removed.

The vehicle's 2nd-row seats havehead restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

The vehicle's 3rd-row seat,if equipped, has headrests thatcan be adjusted up and down.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar under the front edgeof the seat cushion to unlockthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.



Center SeatIf equipped, the center frontseatback doubles as an armrestand cupholder/storage area for thedriver and passenger when thecenter front seat is not used. Do notuse it as a seating position whenthe seatback is folded down.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. If available, raise or lower thefront or rear part of the seatcushion by moving the front orrear of the control up or down.

. If available, raise or lower theentire seat by moving the entirecontrol up or down.

To adjust the seatback, see“Power Reclining Seatbacks” underReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑7.

Memory Seat, Mirrors, andPedals

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the controls on the driverdoor are used to program andrecall memory settings for thedriver seat, outside mirrors, and theadjustable throttle and brake pedals,if equipped.



Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, both outside mirrors,and the throttle and brakepedals, if available.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑18and Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal on page 9‑28 formore information.

Not all mirrors and adjustablethrottles and brake pedals willhave the ability to save andrecall their positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall, press and release “1”or “2.” The vehicle must be inP (Park). A single beep will sound.The seat, outside mirrors, andadjustable throttle and brake pedalswill move to the position previouslystored for the identified driver.

Memory Remote Recall

The memory feature can recall thedriver seat, outside mirrors, andpedals, if available, to storedpositions when entering the vehicle.

To activate, unlock the driverdoor with the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. The driverseat, outside mirrors, and adjustablepedals, if available, will move to thememory position associated withthe transmitter used to unlock thevehicle.

This feature can be turned on or offusing the vehicle personalizationmenu. See “Memory Seat Recall”under Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5‑47 for moreinformation.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the power seat controls, memorybuttons, or power mirror buttons,or the adjustable pedal switch.

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or the adjustable pedalswhile recalling a memory position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold theappropriate manual control for thememory item that is not recallingfor two seconds. Try recalling thememory position again by pressingthe appropriate memory button.If the memory position is still notrecalling, see the dealer for service.



Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature can move the seatrearward to allow extra room to exitthe vehicle.

B (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Pressto recall the easy exit seat position.The vehicle must be in P (Park).

If the easy exit seat feature isprogrammed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, automaticseat movement occurs when theignition key is removed.

A single beep sounds. The driverseat moves back approximately8 cm (3 in). To move the seat backfarther, press the easy exit seatbutton again until the seat is all theway back.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and holdthe power seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exit

position again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see the dealer forservice.

See “Easy Exit Recall” and“Easy Exit Setup” under VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑47 for more information.

Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

If equipped, increase or decreasemanual lumbar support by turningthe knob forward or rearward.

Power Lumbar

To adjust the power lumbar support,if equipped:. On vehicles with two-way

lumbar, press and hold thetop or bottom of the control toincrease or decrease lumbarsupport.

. On vehicles with four-waylumbar, press and hold the frontor rear of the control to increaseor decrease lumbar support.



To raise or lower the height ofthe support, press and hold thetop or bottom of the control.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you pusha pedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To adjust a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

The seatback will automaticallyfold forward.

2. To recline, move the seatbackrearward to the desired position,then release the lever to lock theseatback in place.







Power Reclining Seatbacks

To recline a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. Thismay cause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.


I (Heated Seatback): Press toheat the seatback only.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to heat the seat andseatback.



Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each pressof the button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then to the off setting. Thelights indicate three for the highestsetting and one for the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

The heated seats will be canceled10 seconds after the ignition isturned off.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats may turn on automaticallyduring a remote vehicle start. Theheated seats will be canceled whenthe ignition is turned on. Press thedesired button to use the heatedseats after the vehicle is started.

The lights on the heated seatbuttons do not turn on during aremote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 for more information.

Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Seethe Warning under Heated FrontSeats on page 3‑9.




H (Cooled Seat): Press to coolthe seat.

I (Heated Seatback): Press toheat the seatback only.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to heat the seat andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting and onefor the lowest.

The heated and cooled seats turnoff automatically when the ignition isturned off. To use this feature afterrestarting the vehicle, press thedesired button again.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats may turn on automaticallyduring a remote vehicle start. Theheated seats will be canceled whenthe ignition is turned on. Press thedesired button to use the heatedseats after the vehicle is started.

The lights on the heated seatbuttons do not turn on during aremote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 for more information.



Rear Seats

Heated Rear Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Seethe Warning under Heated FrontSeats on page 3‑9.

If available, the buttons are on theRear Sear Audio (RSA) panel on therear of the center console.

Press M or L to heat the leftoutboard or right outboard seatcushion. An indicator on the RSAdisplay appears when this featureis on.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat changesto the next lower setting, and thenthe off setting. Indicator bars nextto the symbol show the setting:three for high, two for medium, andone for low.

The heated seats are canceledwhen the ignition is turned off.

Second Row SeatsThe second row seats can be foldedfor additional cargo space or foldedand tumbled for easy entry and exitto the third row seat, if equipped.The seat has either the manual foldand tumble feature or the automaticseat release fold and tumblefeature.



Reclining Seatbacks(Bucket Seats Only)

On vehicles with second rowbucket seats, the seatbacks can bereclined.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.




{ WARNING



Manual Fold and TumbleFeature

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:

1. Make sure that there is nothingunder, in front of, or on the seat.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

2. Lift the lever, on the outboardside of the seat, to release theseatback.



The seatback will fold forward tocreate a flat load floor.

If the seatback cannot fold flat,try moving the front seat forwardand/or put the front seatback inthe upright position.

3. Lift the lever again to release therear of the seat from the floor.The seat will tumble forward.

Folding and Tumbling the Seatfrom the Third Row Seat

{ WARNING

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.



To fold and tumble the seat from thethird row seat, if equipped:



60/40 Split-Bench Seat Shown,Bucket Seat Similar

2. Lift the lever, on the bottom rearof the second row seat on theinboard side, to release theseatback. The seatback will foldforward.

3. Lift the same lever again torelease the rear of the seat fromthe floor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Automatic Fold and TumbleFeature

The transmission must be inP (Park) for this feature to work.

{ WARNING

Automatically folding andtumbling the seat when someoneis sitting in the seat, could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always make sure there is no onesitting in the seat before pressingthe automatic seat release button.



Folding and Tumbling the SecondRow Seat from the Third Row Seator Outside the Vehicle

{ WARNING

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.

To fold and tumble the seat from thethird row seat, if equipped:



Driver Side Rear Panel ButtonShown

2. Press the automatic seat releasebutton on the panel behind therear doors.

The seatback automaticallyfolds flat and the seat tumblesforward. There will be a slightdelay between the folding of theseatback and the tumbling ofthe seat.

Returning the Seat to theSitting Position

To return the seat to the sittingposition from the tumbled position:

1. Pull the seat down until it latchesto the floor. The seatback cannotbe raised if the seat is notlatched to the floor.

{ WARNING


2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked.



{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check tobe sure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

3. For the 60/40 split-bench seat,make sure the safety belt in thecenter seating position is notcaught between the two seatsand is not twisted.

Third Row SeatsIf the vehicle has a third row seat,the seatback can be folded, andthe entire seat can be tumbled orremoved from the vehicle.

Folding the Seatback

To fold the seatback:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the seat.

2. Remove all items on the seatcushion.


3. Lift the release lever “1,” on thebottom rear of the seatback onthe outboard side of the seat,and the seatback folds forward.



Returning the Seatback to theUpright Position



2. Raise the seatback to theupright position.

{ WARNING



Tumbling the Third Row Seat

To tumble the seat:


2. Make sure the headrests arecompletely lowered and there isnothing under, in front of, or onthe seat.

3. Fold the seatbacks forwardusing lever “1” and theinstructions listed previouslyunder “Folding the Seatback.”The seat cannot be unlatchedfrom the floor unless theseatback is folded.

4. Unlatch the seat from the floorby lifting lever “2” next to thecarrying handle on the rear ofthe seat, near the bottom.

5. Lift the rear of the seat up fromthe floor.

6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lockit into place.

7. Push and pull on the seat tomake sure it is locked.

Put the seat in this position onlywhen necessary for additional cargospace.



Returning the Third Row Seatfrom a Tumbled Position

To return the seat to the normalseating position:


2. Make sure there is nothing thatcould become trapped underthe seat.

3. Release the seat from thetumbled position by liftinglever “2” next to the carryinghandle at the bottom rear ofthe seat.

4. Pull the seat down until it latchesto the floor. The seatback cannotbe raised to the upright positionunless the seat is latched to thefloor.


{ WARNING



Removing the Third Row Seat

To remove the seat:


2. Fold the seatbacks forwardusing lever “1” and theinstructions listed previouslyunder “Folding the Seatback.”The seat cannot be unlatchedfrom the floor unless theseatback is folded.

3. Unlatch the seat from the floorby pulling the handle at the rearof the seat “3 Removal Only”toward the rear of the vehicle.

4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle.There is a track in the floor toguide the seat wheels out of thevehicle.



Installing the Third Row Seat

To install the seat:

1. Open the liftgate to access therear of the vehicle.

2. Slide the front outboard seatwheels into the track on the floorand roll the seat forward. Thefront latches should lock intoplace. If the latches do not lock,try tilting the rear of the seatupward slightly.

3. Lower the rear of the seat andpush down on the seat toengage the rear floor latches.

{ WARNING

A seat that is not locked intoplace properly can move aroundin a collision or sudden stop.People in the vehicle could beinjured. Be sure to lock theseat into place properly wheninstalling it.

4. Push and pull on the seat tomake sure it is locked into place.The seatback cannot be raisedto the upright position unless theseat is latched to the floor.


{ WARNING



{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check tobe sure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

7. Make sure the safety belts arereturned to the original positionover the seatbacks.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride wherea safety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. Youand your passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be,if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, andcheck that your passenger(s)are restrained properly too.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle thatis not equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inthe vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑17 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be ina crash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!



Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.



The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow downas the vehicle does. You get moretime to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.



Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is true notonly in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25mi) of home. And thegreatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occurat speeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.



How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there aredifferent rules for smaller childrenand infants. If a child will be riding inthe vehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑54 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑56. Follow thoserules for everyone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt moreoften in crashes than those whoare wearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front of you.The lap part of the belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, just

touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If youslid under it, the belt would applyforce on your abdomen. This couldcause serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.



Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is tooloose. It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if theshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. Itwill not give nearly as muchprotection this way.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if thelap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.The lap belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.


A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured if thebelt is buckled in the wrong placelike this. In a crash, the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, noton the pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.Always buckle the belt into thebuckle nearest you.




A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured if thebelt goes over an armrest likethis. The belt would be much toohigh. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.


A: The belt is behind the body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would thenbe applied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.




A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt except forthe center front passenger position,if equipped, which has a lap belt.See Lap Belt on page 3‑36 for moreinformation.

The lap‐shoulder belts for the firstand second row seating positionsare equipped with free‐falling latchplates. If the vehicle has a third row,the lap‐shoulder belts have eitherfree‐falling or cinching latch plates.



Use the following pictures todetermine the latch plate style:

Free-Falling Latch Plate

Cinching Latch Plate

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt with a free‐fallinglatch plate is pulled out all theway, the child restraint lockingfeature may be engaged. If thishappens, let the belt go back allthe way and start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the right frontseating position may affect thepassenger sensing system,if equipped. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑47for more information.



If the belt stops before it reachesthe buckle, for lap‐shoulder beltswith cinching latch plates, tiltthe latch plate and keep pullingthe safety belt until it can bebuckled.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If you findthat the latch plate will not gofully into the buckle, see if youare using the correct buckle.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑37.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”in this section for instructionson use and important safetyinformation.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be surethe safety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thebelt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on theshoulder and not falling off of it.The belt should be close to, butnot contacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑25.

Squeeze the buttons (A) on thesides of the height adjuster andmove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

The adjuster can be moved up justby pushing up on the shoulder beltguide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move itdown without squeezing the buttonsto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safetybelt pretensioners cannot be seen,they are part of the safety beltassembly. They can help tightenthe safety belts during the earlystages of a moderate to severefrontal, near frontal, or rear crashif the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.And, if the vehicle has side impactairbags, safety belt pretensionerscan help tighten the safety belts ina side crash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash on page 3‑38.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

There is one guide, if equipped, foreach outside passenger positionin the second row seat and thethird row, if the vehicle has one.

Second Row

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. For the second row, remove theguide from its storage clip on theinterior body.

Third Row

If your vehicle has a third row,remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side ofthe seat.



2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.



To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide into its storage clip on theinterior body or storage pocket onthe side of the seat.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should weara lap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Lap BeltThis part is only for the lap belt. Tolearn how to wear a lap-shoulderbelt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑30.

The vehicle may have a centerseating position. When you sit in thecenter front seating position, youhave a lap safety belt, which has noretractor.

To make the belt longer, tilt the latchplate and pull it along the belt.



Buckle, position and release it thesame way as the lap part of alap-shoulder belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until the belt is snug.

If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender on page 3‑37.

Make sure the release button on thebuckle is positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.

If you find that the latch plate willnot go fully into the buckle, see ifyou are using the correct buckle. Besure that the latch plate clicks wheninserted into the buckle.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that thesafety belt reminder light, safetybelts, buckles, latch plates,retractors, and anchorages areworking properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety beltsystem parts that might keep asafety belt system from doing itsjob. See your dealer to have itrepaired. Torn or frayed safety beltsmay not protect you in a crash.They can rip apart under impactforces. If a belt is torn or frayed, geta new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑17 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑38.



Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death ina crash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑18.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A roof-rail airbag for the driver

and passenger directly behindthe driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and the personseated directly behind thatpassenger.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:. A seat‐mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat‐mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. If the vehicle has a third rowseat, it will have a third rowroof-rail airbag.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat‐mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑43.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to any airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof the seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear a safety belt,even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle safety beltsystem nor its airbag systemis designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑54 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑56.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑18 formore information.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger's side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If the vehicle has seat‐mounted sideimpact airbags for the driver andright front passenger, they are inthe side of the seatbacks closest tothe door.




The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.


If the vehicle has a third rowpassenger seat, the roof-rail airbagsare located in the ceiling abovethe rear windows for the outboardpassenger positions in the third row.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessoriesthat block the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's orright front passenger's head andchest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags willor should deploy is not based onhow fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an objectthat deforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectdoes not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has a seat positionsensor. Vehicles with dual stageairbags also have seat positionsensors which enable the sensingsystem to monitor the position ofthe driver seat and may or may notmonitor the position of the frontpassenger seat.



The seat position sensor providesinformation that is used to determineif the airbags should deploy at areduced level or at full deployment.

The vehicle may or may not haveseat‐mounted side impact airbags.The vehicle has roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 3‑39.Seat‐mounted side impact airbagsand roof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Seat‐mounted sideimpact airbags and roof-rail airbagswill inflate if the crash severity isabove the system's designedthreshold level. The threshold levelcan vary with specific vehicledesign.

Roof-rail airbags are notintended to inflate in rear impacts.A seat‐mounted side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the sideof the vehicle that is struck. Bothroof-rail airbags will deploy wheneither side of the vehicle is struck orif the sensing system predicts thatthe vehicle is about to roll over, or ina severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.For seat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat‐mounted side impact airbags,there are airbags modules in theside of the front seatbacks closestto the door. For vehicles withroof-rail airbags, there are airbagmodules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows that haveoccupant seating positions.



How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants inthe outboard seating positions inthe first, second, and third rows,if equipped with a third row seat.The rollover capable roof-railairbags are designed to helpreduce the risk of full or partialejection in rollover events, althoughno system can prevent all suchejections.

But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑43 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be atleast partially inflated for sometime after they deploy. Somecomponents of the airbag modulemay be hot for several minutes. Forlocation of the airbag modules, seeWhat Makes an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑44.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may bewarm, but not too hot to touch.



There may be some smoke anddust coming from the vents in thedeflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver fromseeing out of the windshield orbeing able to steer the vehicle, nordoes it prevent people from leavingthe vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soonas it is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle may have a featurethat may automatically unlock thedoors, turn on the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turnoff the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers by using thecontrols for those features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough toinflate the airbags may have alsodamaged important functionsin the vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need somenew parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑14 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑15.



. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemIf the vehicle has the passengerairbag status indicator pictured inthe following illustration, then thevehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the right front passengerposition. The passenger airbagstatus indicator, if equipped, isvisible on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started.

In addition, if the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position, thelabel on the vehicle's sun visorsrefers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, will bevisible during the system check.If you are using remote start,if equipped, to start the vehiclefrom a distance, you may not seethe system check. When the systemcheck is complete, either the wordON or OFF, or the symbol for on oroff, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5‑19.

The passenger sensing systemwill turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. The driverairbag, seat‐mounted side impactairbags (if equipped) and theroof-rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are partof the right front passenger seatand safety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presenceof a properly-seated occupantand determine if the right frontpassenger frontal airbag should beenabled (may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.



We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines an infant

is present in a child restraint.. A right front passenger takes

his/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit as areminder that the airbag is off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑19.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate)the right front passenger frontalairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size issitting properly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may notturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag, depending uponthe person's seating postureand body build. Everyone in thevehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑18 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3‑69or Securing Child Restraints(Center Front Seat Position) onpage 3‑72 or Securing ChildRestraints (Right Front SeatPosition) on page 3‑73.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatback isnot pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint. Ifthis happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.



6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could be

because that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuversand braking, which helps thepassenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbagstatus. See “Safety Belts” and“Child Restraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

If the shoulder portion of the beltis pulled out all the way, the childrestraint locking feature will beengaged. This may unintentionallycause the passenger sensingsystem to turn the airbag off forsome adult‐size occupants. If thishappens, let the belt go back all theway and start again.



A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, andseat massagers, can affect howwell the passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend thatyou not use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑52 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

The on indicator may be lit ifan object, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is puton an unoccupied seat. If this isnot desired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑12.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange your vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle may havea passenger sensing systemfor the right front passenger'sposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passenger's

seat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operateproperly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim,or with GM covers, upholsteryor trim designed for a differentvehicle. Any object, such asan aftermarket seat heater ora comfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or ontop of the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑47.

If you have any questionsabout this, you should contactCustomer Assistance beforeyou modify your vehicle. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are in

Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10‑66 for additionalimportant information.

Q: What if I added a snow plow?Will it keep the airbags fromworking properly?

A: We have designed our airbagsystems to work properly undera wide range of conditions,including snow plowing withvehicles that have the optionalSnow Plow Prep Package(RPO VYU). But do not changeor defeat the snow plow's“tripping mechanism.” If you do,it can damage your snow plowand your vehicle, and it maycause an airbag inflation.



Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance arein Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenanceor replacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.

See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑18 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑44. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resulting

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

in serious injury or even death.To help make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on when you are driving,the airbag system may not workproperly. Have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑18 for moreinformation.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat witha lap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑30 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑30.



According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, thetwo children can be crushedtogether and seriously injured.A safety belt must be used byonly one person at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. Ina crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The child

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

might also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would thenbe applied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder beltsoffer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

110 kg (240 lb) force on aperson's arms. An infant shouldbe secured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular

restraint should take intoconsideration not only thechild's weight, height, and agebut also whether or not therestraint will be compatible withthe motor vehicle in which it willbe used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.



The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain lowon the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a childrestraint designed to improvethe fit of the vehicle's safety beltsystem. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance ofinjury, the child restraint mustbe secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be securedin vehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.



See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑62 for more information.Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints.In the U.S., refer to theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) websiteto locate the nearest child safetyseat inspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childis not properly secured in thechild restraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.



{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing systemwhich is designed to turn off theright front passenger frontalairbag under certain conditions.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, hasturned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, no

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

system is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even thoughit is turned off.


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑47 for additionalinformation.

{ WARNING

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.



Depending on where you placethe child restraint and the size ofthe child restraint, you may not beable to access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used ifthe child restraint prevents accessto or interferes with the routing ofthe safety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle— even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraintwith a top tether, you must alsouse either the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be attached using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need achild restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments.The following explains how toattach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have asingle attachment (B) to securethe top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for your childrestraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second Row — 60/40

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

Second Row — Bucket

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

Third Row Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.There is one top tether anchor thatcan be used for either the third rowcenter or driver side seating positionbut not both at the same time.

For models with a third row seat,see the information following forinstalling a child restraint with atop tether in the third row, if yourvehicle has one. Never installtwo top tethers using the sametop tether anchor.



For models with 60/40 secondrow seating, the rear right sidepassenger and center seatingpositions have exposed metalanchors located in the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

For models with second row bucketseats, both rear seating positionshave exposed metal anchorslocated in the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.

Second Row Seat — Bucket

For models with bucket second rowseating, the top tether anchors arelocated at the bottom rear of theseat cushion for each seatingposition in the second row. Be sureto use an anchor located on thesame side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Second Row Seat — 60/40

For models with 60/40 second rowseating, the top tether anchors arelocated at the bottom rear of theseat cushion for each seatingposition in the second row. Be sureto use an anchor located on thesame side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.



Third Row Seat

For vehicles with a third row seat,there is one top tether anchorlocated at the bottom rear of theseat cushion that can be used foreither the third row center or driverside seating position. Never installtwo top tethers using the same toptether anchor.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑60 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injuredor killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.



{ WARNING

Do not attach more than onechild restraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. Thismay damage these parts.If necessary, move buckledsafety belts to avoid rubbingthe LATCH attachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten thelower attachments to thelower anchors. If the childrestraint does not have lower

attachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if the vehicle has one.



Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

. If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

. If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

. If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and you

are using a single tether,raise the headrest or headrestraint and route thetether under the headrestor head restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

. If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether around theinboard or outboard sideof the headrest or headrestraint.



. If the position you are usinghas a fixed or an adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the headrest orhead restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure itis securely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in)of movement, for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theLATCH system in the vehicle.A damaged LATCH system maynot properly secure the childrestraint, resulting in seriousinjury or even death in a crash.To help make sure the LATCHsystem is working properly aftera crash, see your dealer to havethe system inspected and anynecessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position)When securing a child restraintin a rear seating position, studythe instructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has theLATCH system, see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑62 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraintis secured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑62 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑60.

The vehicle's lap‐shoulder belts forthe first and second row seatingpositions are equipped withfree‐falling latch plates. If thevehicle has a third row, thelap‐shoulder belts have eitherfree‐falling or cinching latch plates.

Use the following pictures todetermine the latch plate style:

Free‐Falling Latch Plate

Cinching Latch Plate

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



For third row seating positions,with cinching latch plates, tilt thelatch plate to adjust the belt ifneeded.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.


4. For passenger seating positionswith a lap‐shoulder belt and afree‐falling latch plate, pull therest of the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When installing a childrestraint using a lap‐shoulderbelt and a cinching latch plate,skip Step 4 and proceed toStep 5.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑62 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the safety belt path andattempt to move it side‐to‐sideand back‐and‐forth. Whenthe child restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety beltand let it return to the stowedposition. If the top tether is attachedto a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition)

{ WARNING

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraintin a rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.



Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑60.

In addition, the vehicle may have apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑47 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑19 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great ifthe airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing systemwhich is designed to turn offthe right front passenger frontalairbag under certain conditions.

Even if the passengersensing system, if equipped,has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, no

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

system is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑47 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has theLATCH system, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑62for how and where to install thechild restraint using LATCH.



If a child restraint is secured using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑62 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.


5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the vehicle is equipped with thepassenger sensing system, andwhen the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑19.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “Ifthe On Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑47 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxLift up on the glove box lever toopen it.

CupholdersFor vehicles with cupholders locatedin the front and rear of the floorconsole or in the fold down armrest,adjust the front cupholders bymoving the insert forward orrearward.

Pull downward on the lid to accessthe rear floor console cupholders.

There could also be cupholderslocated in the second and third rowseat armrest areas.


4-2 Storage

Armrest StorageFor vehicles with a rear seatarmrest, pull the loop at the top ofthe armrest down to access thecupholders.

Rear StorageFor vehicles with a rear storagearea, it is located in the rear cargoarea of the vehicle on thedriver side.

Turn the knobs and pull the storagedoor to access. The door can beremoved.

Center Console StorageFor vehicles with a consolecompartment, it is located betweenthe bucket seats.

Press the button and lift the lid toaccess the console compartment.

A cupholder located in the rear ofthe console, swings down for therear seat passenger to use.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Cover

{ WARNING

An improperly stored cargocover could be thrown aboutthe vehicle during a collision orsudden maneuver. Someonecould be injured. If the cover isremoved, always store it in theproper storage location. When itis replaced, always be sure that itis securely reattached.

To use the cargo cover, if equipped:

1. Pull the cover handle toward therear of the vehicle.

2. Latch the cover posts into theretaining sockets on the cargoarea trim panels.

To return the cover to the retractedposition:

1. Pull up on the cover handle torelease the cover posts from theretaining sockets.

2. Let the cover move forward tothe full retracted position.

To remove the cover from a regularwheelbase model:

1. Let the cover go all the way intothe holder.

2. Then, grasping the driver sidecover end cap, push the coverend cap toward the passengerside of the vehicle.

3. Swing the cover rearward andtake it out of the vehicle.


Storage 4-3

To put the cover in the vehicle:

1. Make sure the cover slot in theholder faces rearward with theround surface facing down.

2. Then, hold the cover at an angleand place the cover end cap intothe slot in the passenger sidetrim panel.

3. Move the other end of the coverforward and hold it next to thedriver side trim panel slot.

4. Press the end caps in, to allowthe cover to fit into the trim slot.

5. Pull lightly on the cover holder tomake sure it is secure.

On extended wheelbase modelsthere are two cover positions.The slots furthest forward allowthe cover to be used if thethird seat is removed or foldeddown. The cover can beinstalled and removed fromeither side.

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried ontop of the vehicle that islonger or wider than the roofrack — like paneling, plywood,or a mattress — the wind cancatch it while the vehicle is beingdriven. The item being carriedcould be violently torn off, andthis could cause a collision, anddamage the vehicle. Never carrysomething longer or wider thanthe roof rack on top of the vehicleunless using a GM certifiedaccessory carrier.

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items.For roof racks that do not havecrossrails included, GMCertifiedcrossrails can be purchased as anaccessory. See your dealer foradditional information.

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace.


4-4 Storage

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle.For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑23.. If small heavy objects are placed

on the roof, cut a piece of 9 mmor 3/8 inch plywood to fit insidethe crossrails and siderails tospread the load. Tie the plywoodto the siderail supports.

. Tie the load and secure it tothe crossrails or the siderailsupports. Use the crossrails onlyto keep the load from sliding. Tomove a crossrail, lift the releaselever up, on both sides of therail. Then slide the crossrail tothe desired position balancingthe force side to side. Pressthe release lever down on bothsides of the rail, down to tightenit. Try to slide the crossrail backand forth slightly to make sure itis tight.

. To carry long items, movethe crossrails as far apart aspossible. Tie the load to thecrossrails and the siderails orsiderail supports. Also tie theload to the bumpers, but do nottie the load so tightly that thecrossrails or siderails aredamaged.

. After moving a crossrail, be sureit is securely locked into thesiderail.

A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) is located above the rearwindow glass.

Make sure items loaded on the roofof the vehicle do not block ordamage the CHMSL.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-17Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-18Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-20MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-25StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-25Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-26Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-27Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-28Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-38Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-39Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-41Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-41Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-42Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-42Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-45Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-46Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-47

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-55Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

The tilt lever is located on the lowerleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thewheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w /cx (Next/Previous): Pressto select preset or favorite radiostations, select tracks on a CD/DVD, or navigate an iPod or USBdevice.



Radio

To select preset or favorite radiostations:

Press and releasew orcx togo to the next or previous radiostation stored as a preset orfavorite.

CD/DVD

To select tracks on a CD/DVD:

Press and releasew orcx togo to the next or previous track.

Selecting Tracks on an iPod orUSB Device (Vehicles without aNavigation System)

1. Press and holdw orcxwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and releasew orcxto scroll up or down the list, thenpress and holdw, or press ¨ toplay the highlighted track.

Navigating Folders on an iPod orUSB Device (Vehicles without aNavigation System):

1. Press and holdw orcxwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and holdcx to goback to the previous folder list.

3. Press and releasew orcxto scroll up or down the list.. To select a folder,

press and holdw, or

press ¨ when the folder ishighlighted.

. To go back further inthe folder list, press andholdcx.

Navigating an iPod or USBDevice on the Main Audio Screen(Vehicles with a NavigationSystem)

1. Press and releasew orcxto select the next or previoustrack within the selectedcategory.

2. Press and holdw orcx tomove quickly through the tracks.

3. Press and release ¨ to move upone track within the selectedcategory.

Navigating an iPod or USB Deviceon the Music Navigator Screen(Vehicles with a NavigationSystem)

1. Press and releasew orcxto select the next or previoustrack within the selectedcategory.

2. Press and holdw orcx tomove quickly through the trackswithin the selected category.



3. Press and release ¨ to move upone track within the selectedcategory.

b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar systems, press and hold forlonger than two seconds to interactwith those systems. See Bluetoothon page 7‑47 and the OnStarOwner's Guide for more information.

cx (End): Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

SRCE (Source/VoiceRecognition): Press to switchbetween the radio and CD, and forequipped vehicles, the DVD, frontauxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

For vehicles with the navigationsystem, press and hold this buttonfor longer than one second toinitiate voice recognition. See“Voice Recognition” in theNavigation System manual formore information.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to thenext radio station while in AM,FM, or XM™.

For vehicles with or without anavigation system:

Press ¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD orDVD slot.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folderwhen navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.

For vehicles with a navigationsystem:

1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep isheard, to place the radio intoSCAN mode. A station will playfor five seconds before movingto the next station.

2. To stop the SCAN function,press ¨ again.

While listening to a CD/DVD, pressand hold ¨ to quickly move forwardthrough the tracks. Release to stopon the desired track.

+ e − e (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the volume.

HornTo sound the horn, press the centerpad on the steering wheel.



Windshield Wiper/Washer

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn to8,then release. Several wipes, holdthe band on8 longer.

9 (Off): Turns the windshieldwipers off.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.

? (High Speed): Fast wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10‑33.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.

Windshield Washer

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

L (Washer Fluid): Push thispaddle to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers clear thewindow and then either stop orreturn to the preset speed.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

The rear wiper control is located onthe turn and lane‐change lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide thelever to a wiper position.

9 (Off): Turns the wiper off.

5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Turns onthe rear wiper delay.

Z (Rear Wiper): Turns on the rearwiper.



= (Rear Wiper Wash): Press thisbutton on the end of the lever tospray washer fluid on the rearwindow. The wipers will clear therear window and either stop orreturn to your preset speed. Formore washer cycles, press and holdthe button.

The rear window wiper/washer willnot operate if the liftgate or liftglassis open or ajar. If the liftgate orliftglass is opened while the rearwiper is on, the wiper returns to theparked position and stops.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eight uponleaving the factory. Your dealer willset the correct zone for yourlocation.

Under certain circumstances,such as during a long-distance,cross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate forcompass variance by resettingthe zone through the DIC if thezone is not set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving.Only set it when the vehicle is inP (Park).

Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays. Or, if the vehicle doesnot have DIC buttons, press thetrip odometer reset stem untilCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.



3. Press the set/reset button toscroll through and select theappropriate variance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel buttonuntil the vehicle heading,for example, N for North, isdisplayed in the DIC. Or, if thevehicle does not have DICbuttons, press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem fortwo seconds to select the nextavailable variance zone. Repeatthis step until the appropriatevariance zone is displayed.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as anopen parking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.

It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be astrong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CBor cell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zoneis set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is located.See “Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof,climate controls, or seats duringthe calibration procedure.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays. Or, if the vehicledoes not have DIC buttons,press the trip odometer resetstem until CALIBRATECOMPASS displays.



3. Press the set/reset button tostart the compass calibration.Or, if the vehicle does not haveDIC buttons, press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem fortwo seconds to start thecompass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehiclein tight circles at less than8 km/h (5 mph) to completethe calibration. The DICwill display CALIBRATIONCOMPLETE for a few secondswhen the calibration is complete.The DIC display will then returnto the previous menu.

ClockTo set the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, thenpress the O button to turn theradio on.

2. Press the H button to displayHR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,minute, month, day, and year).

3. Press the softkey located underany one of the tabs to changethat setting.

4. To increase the time or date, doone of the following:. Press the softkey below the

selected tab.

. Press the ¨ SEEK button.

. Press the\ FWD button.

. Turn the f knob clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date, doone of the following:

. Press the © SEEK button.

. Press thes REV button.

. Turn the f knobcounterclockwise.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or to changethe date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press the H button and thenthe softkey located below theforward arrow tab. 12H, 24H, thedate MM/DD (month and day),and DD/MM/ (day and month)displays.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe desired option.

3. Press the H button again toapply the desired option, or letthe screen time out.



Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There are two under the climatecontrols, one inside the centerfloor console, one on the rearof the center floor console andone accessory power outlet inthe rear cargo area on thepassenger side.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

The accessory power outlets arepowered, even with the ignitionoff. Continuing to use accessorypower outlets while the ignition is inLOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle'sbattery to run down.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain accessory plugs may notbe compatible with the accessorypower outlet and could overloadadapter or vehicle fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

When adding electricalequipment, be sure to follow theproper installation instructionsincluded with the equipment. Donot use equipment exceeding themaximum amperage rating of20 amperes. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑94.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the poweroutlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.The power outlets are designedfor accessory power plugs only,such as cell phone charge cords.



Power Outlet 110 VoltAlternative Current

The vehicle may have a poweroutlet that can be used to plug inelectrical equipment that uses amaximum limit of 150 watts.

The power outlet is located on therear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN and equipment requiringless than 150 watts is plugged intothe outlet, and no system fault isdetected.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protectioncircuit shuts off the power supplyand the indicator light turns off.To reset the circuit, unplug theitem and plug it back in or turn theRemote Accessory Power (RAP)off and then back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑33.

The power outlet is not designed forand may not work properly, if thefollowing are plugged in:. Equipment with high initial

peak wattage such as:compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiringan extremely stablepower supply such as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touch sensorlamps, etc.

Cigarette LighterTo use the cigarette lighter, push itin all the way, and let go. When it isready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



AshtraysThe front ashtray is located near thecenter of the instrument panel or onthe front console, if equipped. Pullon the ashtray door to open it.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

To remove the front ashtray pull theashtray up.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English 6‐Speed Shown, Metric and 2500 Series Similar



If the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed in both kilometers per hour(km/h) and miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last setto zero.

Press the reset button, located onthe instrument panel cluster next tothe trip odometer display, to togglebetween the trip odometer and theregular odometer. Holding the resetbutton for approximately one secondwhile the trip odometer is displayedresets it.

To display the odometer readingwith the ignition off, press the resetbutton.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).




Fuel Gauge

Metric

English

The fuel gauge, when the ignitionis on, shows how much fuel thevehicle has left in the tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehiclethe fuel door is on.

The gauge first indicates emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel,and the vehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon.

When the fuel tank is low, theFUEL LEVEL LOW messageappears in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑42 for moreinformation.

Here are some situations ownersmay experience with the fuel gauge.None of these indicate a problemwith the fuel gauge.. At the gas station, the fuel pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.




Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric

English

The oil pressure gauge shows theengine oil pressure in psi (poundsper square inch) when the engine isrunning. Canadian vehicles indicatepressure in kPa (kilopascals).

Oil pressure may vary with enginespeed, outside temperature and oilviscosity, but readings above thelow pressure zone indicate thenormal operating range. Whenthe oil pressure reaches the lowpressure zone, the OIL PRESSURELOW STOP ENGINE messageappears in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Engine OilMessages on page 5‑41 andEngine Oil on page 10‑7 for moreinformation.



A reading in the low pressure zonemay be caused by a dangerouslylow oil level or some other problemcausing low oil pressure. Check theoil as soon as possible.

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.


Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

It also provides an indicator of howhard the vehicle is working. During amajority of the operation, the gaugereads 100°C (210°F) or less. If youare pulling a load or going up hills,it is normal for the temperature tofluctuate and approach the 122°C(250°F) mark. If the gauge reachesthe 125°C (260°F) mark, it indicatesthat the cooling system is workingbeyond its capacity.



See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑21.


Voltmeter Gauge

When the engine is not running, butthe ignition is on, this gauge showsthe battery's state of charge inDC volts.

When the engine is running, thegauge shows the condition of thecharging system. The chargingsystem regulates voltage based onthe state of the battery for improvedfuel economy and battery life.The gauge may transition from ahigher to lower or a lower to higherreading, this is normal. Readingsbetween the low and high warningzones indicate the normal operatingrange. The gauge may also readlow during the fuel economy mode,this is normal.

Readings in the low warning zonemay occur when a large number ofelectrical accessories are operatingin the vehicle and the engine is leftat an idle for an extended period.This condition is normal since thecharging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle.As engine speeds are increased,this condition should correct itselfas higher engine speeds allowthe charging system to create fullpower. If there is a problem withthe battery charging system, this

light will come on or the SERVICEBATTERY CHARGING SYSTEMDIC message will display. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑38 andCharging System Light onpage 5‑20 for more information.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

When the engine is started, achime sounds for several secondsto remind a driver to fasten thesafety belt, unless the driver safetybelt is already buckled.

The safety belt light comes on andstays on for several seconds, thenflashes for several more.



This chime and light are repeated ifthe driver remains unbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion. If the driversafety belt is already buckled,neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger safety belt reminderlight, several seconds after theengine is started, a chime soundsfor several seconds to remind thefront passenger to buckle theirsafety belt. The passenger safetybelt light, located on the instrumentpanel, comes on and stays on forseveral seconds and then flashesfor several more.

This chime and light are repeated ifthe passenger remains unbuckledand the vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThe system checks the airbag'selectrical system for possiblemalfunctions. If the light stays onit indicates there is an electricalproblem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3‑39.

The airbag readiness light comes onsolid for a few seconds when theengine is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.



{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message can also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5‑45 for more information.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorIf the vehicle has the airbag statusindicator pictured in the followingillustration, then the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatoris on the overhead console. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑47 for important safetyinformation.

In addition, if the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position, thelabel on the vehicle's sun visorsrefers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS.”

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, for severalseconds as a system check. If youare using remote start, if equipped,to start the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the system check.



Then, after several more seconds,the status indicator will light eitherON or OFF, or either the on or offsymbol to let you know the status ofthe right front passenger frontalairbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, bothstatus indicator lights remain on,or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lightsor the passenger sensing system.See your dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑18 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly whenthe ignition key is turned to START,but the engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out oncethe engine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. A chargingsystem message in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) canalso appear. See Battery Voltageand Charging Messages onpage 5‑38 for more information.This light could indicate that thereare problems with a generator drivebelt, or that there is an electricalproblem. Have it checked rightaway. If the vehicle must be driven ashort distance with the light on, turnoff accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.




MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light should come on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with thislight on, after a while, theemission controls might notwork as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not runas smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications madeto the engine, transmission,exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof the vehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thiscould also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfirecondition has been detected.A misfire increases vehicleemissions and could damage theemission control system on thevehicle. Diagnosis and servicemight be required.



To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash,when it is safe to do so, stop thevehicle. Find a safe place to parkthe vehicle. Turn the vehicle off,wait at least 10 seconds, andrestart the engine. If the light is stillflashing, follow the previous stepsand see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemissions system malfunction:. Make sure the fuel cap is

fully installed. See Filling theTank on page 9‑72. Thediagnostic system can determineif the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Make sure the electrical systemis not wet. The system couldbe wet if the vehicle was driventhrough a deep puddle ofwater. The condition is usuallycorrected when the electricalsystem dries out. A few drivingtrips should turn the light off.

. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and cancause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, changethe fuel brand used. It willrequire at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑68.

If none of the above have madethe light turn off, your dealer cancheck the vehicle. The dealerhas the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.



Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and localgovernments may have programsto inspect the on-vehicle emissioncontrol equipment. For theinspection, the emission systemtest equipment is connectedto the vehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. The critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. This can happen ifthe battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery hasrun down. The diagnosticsystem evaluates criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection, your dealer canprepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightWith the ignition on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set. If thevehicle is driven with the parkingbrake engaged, a chime soundswhen the vehicle speed is greaterthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

The vehicle brake systemconsists of two hydraulic circuits.If one circuit is not working, theremaining circuit can still work tostop the vehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on anda chime sounds there could be abrake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.



This light can also come on due tolow brake fluid. See Brake Fluid onpage 10‑27 for more information.

Metric English

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to ON/RUN.If it does not come on then, have itfixed so it is ready to warn if there isa problem.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to pushor might go closer to the floor. It cantake longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑93.


Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.



If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle doesnot have antilock brakes and thereis a problem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑23.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), seeBrake System Messages onpage 5‑38 for all brake relatedDIC messages.


Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

For more information, see Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑42.

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

For vehicles with the StabiliTraksystem, this light comes on brieflywhile starting the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the light comes on and stayson while driving, there could be aproblem with the StabiliTrak systemand the vehicle might need service.When this warning light is on, theStabiliTrak system is off and doesnot limit wheel spin.



The light flashes if the system isactive and is working to assist thedriver with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑52 for more information.


Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engineis started. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or moreof the tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑45 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑56 formore information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may be aproblem with the TPMS. The lightflashes for about a minute andstays on steady for the remainderof the ignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑59 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engineoil maintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.



This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally the indicator light thengoes off.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and it mighthave some other system problem.


Low Fuel Warning Light

This light, under the fuel gauge,comes on briefly while the engine isbeing started.

This light and a chime comes onwhen the fuel tank is low on fuel.The Driver Information Center alsodisplays a “FUEL LEVEL LOW”message. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑42 for moreinformation. When fuel is added thislight and message should go off. If itdoes not, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

Security Light

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Anti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑14.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.



Front Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp lights come on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The lights go out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑6 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑56 for moreinformation.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC).

The DIC displays informationabout your vehicle. It also displayswarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

All messages will appear in theDIC display located below thetachometer in the instrument panelcluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.



The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed bypressing the DIC buttons locatedon the instrument panel, next tothe steering wheel. If the vehicledoes not have DIC buttons, thetrip odometer reset stem can beused to access some of the menuitems.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also allows somefeatures to be customized. SeeVehicle Personalization (With DICButtons) on page 5‑47 for moreinformation.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel,vehicle information, customization,and set/reset buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in thefollowing pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to displaythe odometer, trip odometer, fuelrange, average economy, fuel used,timer, instantaneous economyand Active Fuel Management™indicator, and transmissiontemperature. The compass and

outside air temperature will alsobe shown in the display. Thetemperature will be shown in °Cor °F depending on the unitsselected.

T (Vehicle Information): Pressto display the oil life, units, sideblind zone system on/off, tirepressure readings for vehicles withthe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS), trailer brake gain andoutput information for vehicles withthe Integrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, engine hours,compass zone setting, and compassrecalibration.

U (Customization): Press tocustomize the feature settingson your vehicle. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑47 for more information.

V (Set/Reset): Press to set orreset certain functions and to turnoff or acknowledge messages onthe DIC.



Trip/Fuel Menu Items(With DIC Buttons)

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to scrollthrough the following menu items:

Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either kilometers (km)or miles (mi). Pressing the tripodometer reset stem will alsodisplay the odometer.

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “Units”later in this section.

Trip Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button until TRIPdisplays. This display shows thecurrent distance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi) sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.Pressing the trip odometer resetstem will also display the tripodometer.

The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing the set/resetbutton while the trip odometer isdisplayed. You can also reset thetrip odometer while it is displayedby pressing and holding the tripodometer reset stem.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. Thiscan be used to set the trip odometerto the number of kilometers (miles)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the set/reset buttonfor at least four seconds. The tripodometer will display the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) drivensince the ignition was last turned onand the vehicle was moving. Oncethe vehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.

For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 miles) before it isstarted again, and then theretro-active reset feature isactivated, the display will show 8 km(5 miles). As the vehicle beginsmoving, the display will thenincrease to 8.2 km (5.1 miles),8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.

Fuel Range

Press the trip/fuel button untilFUEL RANGE displays. This displayshows the approximate numberof remaining kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The display willshow LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.



For example, if driving in trafficand making frequent stops, thisdisplay may read one number,but if the vehicle is driven on afreeway, the number may changeeven though the same amountof fuel is in the fuel tank. This isbecause different driving conditionsproduce different fuel economies.Generally, freeway driving producesbetter fuel economy than citydriving. Fuel range cannot be reset.

Average Economy

Press the trip/fuel button until AVGECONOMY displays. This displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based onthe number of L/100 km (mpg)recorded since the last time thismenu item was reset. To resetAVG ECONOMY, press and holdthe set/reset button.

Fuel Used

Press the trip/fuel button untilFUEL USED displays. This displayshows the number of liters (L) orgallons (gal) of fuel used since thelast reset of this menu item. To resetthe fuel used information, press andhold the set/reset button while FUELUSED is displayed.

Timer

Press the trip/fuel button untilTIMER displays. This display canbe used as a timer.

To start the timer, press theset/reset button while TIMER isdisplayed. The display will showthe amount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset, notincluding time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be countedas long as the ignition is on, evenif another display is being shownon the DIC. The timer will recordup to 99 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/resetbutton briefly while TIMER isdisplayed.

To reset the timer to zero, pressand hold the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed.

Transmission Temperature

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRANS TEMP displays. Thisdisplay shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluidin either degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Instantaneous Economy andActive Fuel Management™Indicator

If your vehicle has this display,press the trip/fuel button untilINST ECON V8 displays. Thisdisplay shows the current fueleconomy at a particular momentand will change frequently asdriving conditions change.



This display shows theinstantaneous fuel economy inliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Unlikeaverage economy, this screencannot be reset.

An Active Fuel Managementindicator will display on the rightside of the DIC, while INST ECONdisplays on the left side. ActiveFuel Management allows theengine to operate on either four oreight cylinders, depending on yourdriving demands. When ActiveFuel Management is active, V4 willdisplay on the DIC. When ActiveFuel Management is inactive,V8 will display. See Active FuelManagement® on page 9‑35 formore information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems (With DIC Buttons)

T (Vehicle Information): Pressto scroll through the following menuitems:

Oil Life

Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays. This display shows anestimate of the oil's remaininguseful life. If you see 99%OIL LIFEREMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life systemwill alert you to change the oil ona schedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑41. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10‑7. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE display yourself after each oilchange. It will not reset itself. Also,be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.



Side Blind Zone Alert

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system, thisdisplay allows the system to beturned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset buttonto select between ON or OFF. Ifyou choose ON, the system will beturned on. If you choose OFF, thesystem will be turned off. When theSBZA system is turned off, the DICwill display the SIDE BLIND ZONEALERT SYSTEM OFF messageas a reminder that the systemhas been turned off. See ObjectDetection System Messages onpage 5‑42 and Side Blind Zone Alert(SBZA) on page 9‑60 for moreinformation.

Units

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select between metricor English units of measurement.Once in this display, press theset/reset button to select between

METRIC or units ENGLISH. Allof the vehicle information willthen be displayed in the unit ofmeasurement selected.

Tire Pressure

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either kilopascals (kPa)or pounds per square inch (psi).Press the vehicle informationbutton until the DIC displaysFRONT TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicleinformation button again until theDIC displays REAR TIRES kPa(PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low tire pressure conditionis detected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you toadd pressure in a specific tire willappear in the display. See TirePressure on page 10‑56 and TireMessages on page 5‑45 for moreinformation.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.

Trailer Gain and Output

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC)system, the trailer brake displayappears in the DIC. Press thevehicle information button untilTRAILER GAIN and OUTPUTdisplay.

TRAILER GAIN shows the trailergain setting. This setting can beadjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 witheither a trailer connected ordisconnected. To adjust this setting,see “Integrated Trailer Brake ControlSystem” under Towing Equipmenton page 9‑84 for more information.

OUTPUT shows the power outputto the trailer anytime a trailer withelectric brakes is connected. Outputis displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashesmay appear in the OUTPUT display.



See “Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System” under TowingEquipment on page 9‑84 for moreinformation.

Engine Hours

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil ENGINE HOURS displays. Thisdisplay shows the total number ofhours the engine has run.

Compass Zone Setting

This display allows for setting thecompass zone. See Compass onpage 5‑6

Compass Recalibration

This display allows for calibratingthe compass. See Compass onpage 5‑6

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Trip Odometer Reset StemMenu Items (With DIC Buttons)

Use the trip odometer reset stemto view the odometer and tripodometer. The Language selectionand Engine Hours display can alsobe accessed with the trip odometerreset stem.

Odometer

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil ODOMETER displays. Thisdisplay shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi).

Trip Odometer

Press the trip odometer resetstem until TRIP displays. Thisdisplay shows the current distancetraveled in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) since the last reset for thetrip odometer.

The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing and holding the tripodometer reset stem while the tripodometer is displayed.


To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the trip odometerreset stem for at least four seconds.The trip odometer will display thenumber of kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) driven since the ignitionwas last turned on and the vehiclewas moving. Once the vehiclebegins moving, the trip odometerwill accumulate mileage. Forexample, if the vehicle was driven8 km (5 miles) before it is startedagain, and then the retro-activereset feature is activated, thedisplay will show 8 km (5 miles).As the vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to 8.2 km(5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.



Language

This display allows you to selectthe language in which the DICmessages will appear. To select alanguage:

1. Press the trip odometer resetstem until ODOMETER displays.

2. While in the ODOMETERdisplay, press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem forthree seconds until the currentlyset language displays.

3. Continue to press and holdthe trip odometer reset stem toscroll through all of the availablelanguages.

The available selections areENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS(French), ESPANOL (Spanish),and NO CHANGE.

4. Once the desired languageis displayed, release the tripodometer reset stem to set yourchoice.

Engine Hours

To display the ENGINE HOURS,place the ignition in LOCK/OFF orACC/ACCESSORY, then press andhold the trip odometer reset stemfor four seconds while viewing theODOMETER. This display showsthe total number of hours the enginehas run.

Trip Odometer Reset StemMenu Items (Without DICButtons)

Language

This display allows you to selectthe language in which the DICmessages will appear. To select alanguage:

1. Press the trip odometer resetstem until ODOMETER displays.

2. While in the ODOMETERdisplay, press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem forthree seconds until the currentlyset language displays.

3. Continue to press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem to scrollthrough all of the availablelanguages.

The available languages areENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS(French), ESPANOL (Spanish),and NO CHANGE.

4. Once the desired languageis displayed, release the tripodometer reset stem to set yourchoice.

Trip Odometer

Press the trip odometer resetstem until TRIP displays. Thisdisplay shows the current distancetraveled in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) since the last reset for thetrip odometer.

The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing and holding the tripodometer reset stem while the tripodometer is displayed.




To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the trip odometerreset stem for at least four seconds.The trip odometer will display thenumber of kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) driven since the ignitionwas last turned on and the vehiclewas moving. Once the vehiclebegins moving, the trip odometerwill accumulate mileage. Forexample, if the vehicle was driven8 km (5 miles) before it is startedagain, and then the retro-activereset feature is activated, thedisplay will show 8 km (5 miles).As the vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to 8.2 km(5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.

Transmission Temperature

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil TRANS TEMP displays. Thisdisplay shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid ineither degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Trailer Gain and Output

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,the trailer brake display appears inthe DIC. Press the trip odometerreset stem until TRAILER GAIN andOUTPUT display.

TRAILER GAIN shows the trailergain setting. This setting can beadjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 witheither a trailer connected ordisconnected. To adjust this setting,see “Integrated Trailer Brake ControlSystem” under Towing Equipmenton page 9‑84 for more information.

OUTPUT shows the power outputto the trailer anytime a trailer withelectric brakes is connected. Outputis displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashesmay appear in the OUTPUT display.See “Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System” under TowingEquipment on page 9‑84 for moreinformation.

Compass Zone Setting

This display allows for setting thecompass zone. See Compass onpage 5‑6 for more information.

Compass Recalibration

This display allows for calibratingthe compass. See Compass onpage 5‑6 for more information.



Oil Life

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). Press the tripodometer reset stem until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil'sremaining useful life. If you see99%OIL LIFE REMAINING onthe display, that means 99% ofthe current oil life remains. Theengine oil life system will alert youto change the oil on a scheduleconsistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑41. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10‑7. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE display yourself after each oilchange. It will not reset itself. Also,be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

Relearn Tire Positions

Your vehicle may have this display.To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). If your vehiclehas the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), after rotating thetires or after replacing a tire orsensor, the system must re-learnthe tire positions. To re-learn the tirepositions, see Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑58. See TireInspection on page 10‑62, TireRotation on page 10‑62 and TireMessages on page 5‑45 for moreinformation.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do notrequire immediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V (Set/Reset) or the tripodometer reset stem.

The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously and clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages and some informationabout them.



Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY LOW STARTVEHICLE

When the vehicle’s battery isseverely discharged, this messagewill display and four chimeswill sound. Start the vehicleimmediately. If the vehicle is notstarted and the battery continuesto discharge, the climate controls,heated seats, and audio systemswill shut off and the vehicle mayrequire a jump start. These systemswill function again after the vehicleis started.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problemwith the battery charging system.Under certain conditions, thecharging system light may also turnon in the instrument panel cluster.

See Charging System Light onpage 5‑20. Driving with this problemcould drain the battery. Turn off allunnecessary accessories. Have theelectrical system checked as soonas possible. See your dealer.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑23. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

SERVICE BRAKES SOON

This message displays if there is aproblem with the brake system.If this message appears, stop assoon as possible and turn off thevehicle. Restart the vehicle andcheck for the message on theDIC display. If the message is stilldisplayed or appears again whenyou begin driving, the brake systemneeds service. See your dealer.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message displays and a chimesounds when there is a problemwith the ITBC system.

When this message displays, poweris no longer available to the trailerbrakes.



As soon as it is safe to do so,carefully pull your vehicle over tothe side of the road and turn theignition off. Check the wiringconnection to the trailer and turnthe ignition back on. If this messagestill displays, either your vehicle orthe trailer needs service. See yourdealer.


Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and achime sounds if the driver door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

HOOD OPEN

This message displays and achime sounds if the hood is notfully closed. Stop and turn offthe vehicle, check the hood forobstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver side rear door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the front passenger dooris not fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

REAR ACCESS OPEN

This message displays and achime sounds if the liftgate orliftglass is open while the ignitionis in ON/RUN. Turn off the vehicleand check the liftgate and liftglass.Restart the vehicle and check forthe message on the DIC display.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger side reardoor is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.



Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C (AirConditioning) TURNED OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5‑16. To avoidadded strain on a hot engine,the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When thecoolant temperature returns tonormal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. Youcan continue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑21 for more information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑16.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 10‑23 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑21 for more information.

This message displays and a chimesounds if the engine cooling systemreaches unsafe temperatures foroperation. Stop and turn off thevehicle as soon as it is safe to doso to avoid severe damage. Thismessage clears when the enginehas cooled to a safe operatingtemperature.



Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See EngineOil Life System on page 10‑10 forinformation on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 formore information.

ENGINE OIL HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil becomes hotter than thenormal operating temperature. Stopand allow the vehicle to idle until itcools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑16.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine oil pressure islow, severe engine damage mayoccur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), stop thevehicle as soon as possible. Donot drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure iscorrected. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7 for more information.

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soonas possible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil on page 10‑7.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and a chimesounds when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑21for further information.

This message also displays whenthe engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but thereis no reduction in performance,proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on,but acceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.



Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and a chimesounds if the fuel level is low. Refuelas soon as possible. See FuelGauge on page 5‑14 and Fuel onpage 9‑68 for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument panel cluster if the fuelcap is not tightened properly. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑21. Reinstall the fuel capfully. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑72. The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel capallows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needsto be replaced in the transmitter.See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Lamp Messages

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for1.2 km (0.75 mile). Move the turnsignal/multifunction lever to the offposition.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,this message displays if there issomething interfering with the parkassist system. See UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑58 formore information.

PARK ASSIST OFF

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,after the vehicle has been started,this message displays to remind thedriver that the URPA system hasbeen turned off. Press the set/resetbutton or the trip odometer resetstem to acknowledge this messageand clear it from the DIC display.To turn the URPA system back on,see Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑58.



SERVICE PARK ASSIST

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,this message displays if there is aproblem with the URPA system. Donot use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑58 for more information.See your dealer for service.

SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONEALERT SYSTEM

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system and thismessage displays, both SBZAdisplays will remain on indicatingthere is a problem with the SBZAsystem. If these displays remain onafter continued driving, the systemneeds service. See your dealer. SeeSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) onpage 9‑60 for more information.

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERTSYSTEM OFF

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system, thismessage displays when the SBZAsystem has been turned off. SeeSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) onpage 9‑60 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑28 for moreinformation.

SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system, thismessage displays when the SBZAsystem is disabled because thesensor is blocked and cannot detectvehicles in your blind zone. Thesensor may be blocked by mud, dirt,snow, ice, or slush. This messagemay also display during heavy rainor due to road spray. It may alsocome on when driving in isolatedareas with no guardrails, trees,or road signs and light traffic.Your vehicle does not need service.

For cleaning instructions, seeWashing Your Vehicle in ExteriorCare on page 10‑98. See Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) on page 9‑60 formore information.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® andthis message displays, it meansthere may be a problem with theStabiliTrak system. If you see thismessage, try to reset the system.Stop; turn off the engine for at least15 seconds; then start the engineagain. If this message still comeson, it means there is a problem. Youshould see your dealer for service.The vehicle is safe to drive,however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.



SERVICE SUSPENSIONSYSTEM

If your vehicle has the Autoride®

suspension system, this messagedisplays when the Autoridesuspension system is not operatingproperly. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when there is aproblem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS). When this messagedisplays, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See your dealer forservice. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑52 for more information.

STABILITRAK OFF

If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when you turnoff StabiliTrak, or when the stabilitycontrol has been automaticallydisabled. To limit wheel spin and

realize the full benefits of thestability enhancement system, youshould normally leave StabiliTrakon. However, you should turnStabiliTrak off if your vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snowand you want to rock your vehicleto attempt to free it, or if youare driving in extreme off-roadconditions and require more wheelspin. See If the Vehicle is Stuck onpage 9‑22. To turn the StabiliTraksystem on or off, see StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑52.

There are several conditions thatcan cause this message to appear.. One condition is overheating,

which could occur if StabiliTrakactivates continuously for anextended period of time.

. The message also displays ifthe brake system warning light ison. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑23.

. The message could display if thestability system takes longerthan usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to drivingconditions.

. The message displays if anengine or vehicle relatedproblem has been detectedand the vehicle needs service.See your dealer.

. The message also displaysif the vehicle is shifted into4LO (Two Speed TransferCase Only).

The message turns off as soonas the conditions that caused themessage to be displayed are nolonger present.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when the TractionControl System (TCS) is turned off.Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑52for more information.



Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Have your dealer inspect thesystem for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑18 andAirbag System on page 3‑39 formore information.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See ImmobilizerOperation on page 2‑16 for moreinformation.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

On vehicles with the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS),this message displays if a part onthe TPMS is not working properly.The tire pressure light also flashesand then remains on during thesame ignition cycle. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑26.Several conditions may causethis message to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑59 for more information.If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the TPMSis re-learning the tire positions onyour vehicle. The tire positions mustbe re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.

See Tire Inspection on page 10‑62,Tire Rotation on page 10‑62, TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10‑58, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56 for more information.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires needs to be checked.This message also displays LEFTFRT (left front), RIGHT FRT(right front), LEFT RR (left rear),or RIGHT RR (right rear) toindicate the location of the lowtire. The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑26.You can receive more than onetire pressure message at a time.To read the other messages thatmay have been sent at the sametime, press the set/reset buttonor the trip odometer reset stem. If atire pressure message appears onthe DIC, stop as soon as you can.



Have the tire pressures checkedand set to those shown on the TireLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10‑48, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑23, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56. The DIC also showsthe tire pressure values. See “DICOperation and Displays (With DICButtons)” earlier in this section.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE 4WHEEL DRIVE

This message displays if a problemoccurs with the four-wheel-drivesystem. If this message appears,stop as soon as possible and turnoff the vehicle. Make sure the key isin the LOCK/OFF position for atleast one minute and then restartthe vehicle and check for themessage on the DIC display. Ifthe message is still displayed orappears again when you begindriving, the four-wheel-drive systemneeds service. See your dealer.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, you can damage thetransmission. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by the warranty. Do notdrive the vehicle with overheatedtransmission fluid or while thetransmission temperaturewarning is displayed.

This message displays along with asound if the transmission fluid in thevehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears and the chimestops when the fluid temperaturereaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

CHECK TRAILER WIRING

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message may display and achime may sound when one of thefollowing conditions exists:. A trailer with electric brakes

becomes disconnected from thevehicle.

‐ If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stopped, thismessage clears itself after ashort time.

‐ If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage stays on until theignition is turned off.

. There is a short in the wiring tothe electric trailer brakes.

When this message displays, poweris no longer available to the trailerbrakes.



As soon as it is safe to do so,carefully pull the vehicle over to theside of the road and turn the ignitionoff. Check the wiring connection tothe trailer and turn the ignition backon. This message clears if the traileris reconnected. This message alsoclears if you acknowledge it. If thismessage still displays, either thevehicle or the trailer needs service.See your dealer.


ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

TRAILER CONNECTED

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message displays briefly whena trailer with electric brakes is firstconnected to the vehicle.

This message clears itself afterseveral seconds. This message alsoclears if you acknowledge it. Afterthis message clears, the TRAILERGAIN/OUTPUT display appears inthe DIC.

See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT”under Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5‑28 and “IntegratedTrailer Brake Control System” underTowing Equipment on page 9‑84 formore information.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays whenthe windshield washer fluid is low.Fill the windshield washer fluidreservoir as soon as possible.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Washer Fluid onpage 10‑25 for more information.

VehiclePersonalization

Vehicle Personalization(With DIC Buttons)Your vehicle may havecustomization capabilities thatallow you to program certainfeatures to one preferred setting.Customization features can onlybe programmed to one settingon the vehicle and cannot beprogrammed to a preferred settingfor two different drivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changed fromtheir default state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.



To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customization buttonto scroll through the availablecustomizable options.

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to selectthe language in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press the customization button untilthe DISPLAY LANGUAGE screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press theset/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

You can also change the languageby pressing the trip odometer resetstem. See “Language” under DICOperation and Displays (WithoutDIC Buttons) earlier in this sectionfor more information.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the vehicle's doors willautomatically lock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑9 for moreinformation.



Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR LOCK appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 8 mph(13 km/h) for 3 seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑9 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driverdoor will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park) .

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.



Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the RKEtransmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressedagain within five seconds of theprevious command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 for moreinformation.

Press the customization buttonuntil REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you pressthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you pressthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thevehicle's doors and liftgate will bedelayed. When locking the doorsand liftgate with the power doorlock switch and a door or the liftgateis open, this feature will delaylocking the doors and liftgate untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing the



power door lock switch twice. SeeDelayed Locking on page 2‑9 formore information.

Press the customization button untilDELAY DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until 5 seconds after the lastdoor or the liftgate is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectthe amount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when itis dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turnedfrom ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization buttonuntil EXIT LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

30 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for30 seconds.

1MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for 1 minute.

2MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for 2 minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlights turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.



ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 formore information.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization button untilCHIME VOLUME appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings

for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay atthe last known setting.


PARK TILT MIRRORS

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select whether ornot the outside mirror(s) willautomatically tilt down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑20for more information.

Press the customization button untilPARK TILT MIRRORS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outsidemirror will be tilted down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driveroutside mirror will be tilted downwhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

PASSENGER MIRROR: Thepassenger outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver andpassenger outside mirrors will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).





EASY EXIT RECALL

If your vehicle has this feature,it allows you to select yourpreference for the automatic easyexit seat feature. See Memory Seat,Mirrors, and Pedals in Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT RECALL appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

DOOR BUTTON ONLY: Noautomatic seat exit recall will occur.The recall will only occur afterpressing the easy exit seat button.

BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): Ifthe features are enabled throughthe EASY EXIT SETUP menu, thedriver seat will move back when thekey is removed from the ignition orafter pressing the easy exit seatbutton.

The automatic easy exit seatmovement will only occur one timeafter the key is removed from theignition. If the automatic movementhas already occurred, and you putthe key back in the ignition andremove it again, the seat will stay inthe original exit position, unless amemory recall took place prior toremoving the key again.


To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

EASY EXIT SETUP

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select which areas willrecall with the automatic easy exitseat feature. It also allows you toturn off the automatic easy exitfeature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors,and Pedals in Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4 and“EASY EXIT RECALL” earlier formore information.

Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT SETUP appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: No automatic seat exit willrecall.

SEAT ONLY (Default): The driverseat will recall.





MEMORY SEAT RECALL

If your vehicle has this feature,it allows you to select yourpreference for the remote memoryseat recall feature. See MemorySeat, Mirrors, and Pedals in PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑4 formore information.

Press the customization buttonuntil MEMORY SEAT RECALLappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memoryseat recall will occur.

ON: The driver seat and, on somevehicles, the outside mirrors willautomatically move to the storeddriving position when the unlockbutton on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.On some vehicles with theadjustable throttle and brakepedal feature, the pedals will alsoautomatically move.



REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to turn the remote startoff or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑5 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE START appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.



FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.



Press the customization button untilFACTORY SETTINGS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will notbe set to their factory defaultsettings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press the customization buttonuntil PRESS V TO EXIT FEATURESETTINGS appears in the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to exit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again willreturn you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.. The trip/fuel or vehicle

information DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40 second time period haselapsed with no selection made.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

Vehicles with the Universal RemoteSystem will have these buttonslocated in the headliner.



This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use this system with anygarage door opener that does nothave the stop and reverse feature.This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program thetransmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful tohave another person assist withprogramming the transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remotecontrol transmitter for use in othervehicles, as well as for futureprogramming. Only the originalremote control transmitter is neededfor Fixed Code programming.

The programmed buttons shouldbe erased when the vehicle is soldor the lease ends. See “ErasingUniversal Home Remote Buttons”in this section.

Park the vehicle outside of thegarage when programming a garagedoor. Be sure that people andobjects are clear of the garage dooror gate that is being programmed.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728 orgo to www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers soldafter 1996 are Rolling Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle,press the two outside buttonsat the same time for one totwo seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.



2. In the garage, locate thegarage door opener receiver(motor-head unit). Find the“Learn” or “Smart” button. Itcan usually be found wherethe hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unitand may be a colored button.Press this button. After pressingthis button, complete thefollowing steps in less than30 seconds.

3. Immediately return to thevehicle. Press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonthat will be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator light,above the selected button,should slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to20 seconds.

4. Immediately, within one second,release the button when thegarage door moves. Theindicator light will blink rapidlyuntil programming is complete.

5. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Rolling Codedevice such as an additionalgarage door opener, a securitydevice, or home automation device,repeat Steps 1 through 5, choosinga different function button in Step 3than what was used for the garagedoor opener.

If these instructions do not work,the garage door opener is probablya Fixed Code unit. Follow theprogramming instructions thatfollow for a Fixed Code garagedoor opener.



Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728 or goto www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers soldbefore 1996 are Fixed Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. To verify that the garage dooropener is a Fixed Code unit,remove the battery cover on thehand-held transmitter suppliedby the manufacturer of thegarage door opener motor.If there is a row of dip switchessimilar to the graphic above,the garage door opener is aFixed Code unit. If you do notsee a row of dip switches,

return to the previous sectionfor Programming UniversalHome Remote — Rolling Code.

Your hand-held transmittercan have between 8 to 12 dipswitches depending on thebrand of transmitter.

The garage door openerreceiver (motor head unit)could also have a row of dipswitches that can be used whenprogramming the UniversalHome Remote. If the totalnumber of switches on themotor head and hand-heldtransmitter are different, or if thedip switch settings are different,use the dip switch settings onthe motor head unit to programthe Universal Home Remote.The motor head dip switchsettings can also be used whenthe original hand-held transmitteris not available.



Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Two Positions

Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Three Positions

The panel of switches mightnot appear exactly as they do inthe examples above, but theyshould be similar.

The switch positions on thehand-held transmitter could belabeled as follows:. A switch in the up position

could be labeled as Up,+, or On.

. A switch in the downposition could be labeledas Down, −, or Off.

. A switch in the middleposition could be labeledas Middle, 0, or Neutral.

2. Write down the 8 to 12 switchsettings from left to right asfollows:. When a switch is in the up

position, write “Left.”. When a switch is in the

down position, write “Right.”. If a switch is set between

the up and down position,write “Middle.”

The switch settingswritten down in Step 2 nowbecome the button strokesto be entered into theUniversal Home Remote inStep 4. Be sure to enter theswitch settings written downin Step 2, in order from leftto right, into the UniversalHome Remote, whencompleting Step 4.



3. From inside your vehicle,first firmly press all three buttonsat the same time for aboutthree seconds. Release thebuttons to put the UniversalHome Remote intoprogramming mode.

A. Left Button (Up, +, or On)

B. Middle Button (Middle, 0,or Neutral)

C. Right Button (Down, −,or Off)

4. The indicator lights will blinkslowly. Enter each switch settingfrom Step 2 into your vehicle'sUniversal Home Remote. Youwill have two and one-halfminutes to complete Step 4.Now press one button on theUniversal Home Remote foreach switch setting as follows:. If you wrote “Left,” press

the left button (A) in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Right,” pressthe right button (C) in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Middle,” pressthe middle button (B) in thevehicle.

5. After entering all of theswitch positions, once againfirmly press and release allthree buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the buttonthat will be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicatorlight above the selected buttonshould slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the buttonwhen the garage door moves.The indicator light will blinkrapidly until programming iscomplete.

8. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.



To program another Fixed Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1-8, choosing a differentbutton in Step 6 than what was usedfor the garage door opener.

Universal Remote SystemOperationPress and hold the appropriatebutton for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come onwhile the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming UniversalHome Remote Buttons

Any of the three buttons can bereprogrammed by repeating theinstructions.

Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons

The programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase either Rolling Codeor Fixed Code settings on theUniversal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons at the same time forapproximately 20 seconds,until the indicator lights, locateddirectly above the buttons, beginto blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin toblink, release both buttons. Thecodes from all buttons will beerased.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices on page 13‑3.



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6AuxiliaryRoof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Battery Load Management . . . . 6-9Battery Power Protection . . . . 6-10

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights


6-2 Lighting

The exterior lamps control hasfour positions:

O (Off): Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to the off position again toturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position will only work whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns on the headlamps at normalbrightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

; (Parking Lamps): Turns onthe parking lamps together with thefollowing:. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with thefollowing lamps listed below.. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

When the headlamps are turnedon while the vehicle is on, theheadlamps will turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. When the headlampsare turned on while the vehicle isoff, the headlamps will stay on for10 minutes before automaticallyturning off to prevent the battery

from being drained. Turn theheadlamp control to off and thenback to the headlamp on position tomake the headlamps stay on for anadditional 10 minutes.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA reminder chime will sound whenthe headlamps or parking lamps aremanually turned on and the ignitionis off and a door is open. To disablethe chime, turn the light off.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer53 (Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger): To change theheadlamps from low to high beam,push the lever toward the instrumentpanel. To return to low-beamheadlamps, pull the multifunctionlever toward you. Then release it.


Lighting 6-3

When the high beams are on, thisindicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signala driver in front of you that youwant to pass. It works even if theheadlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps will turnon. They will stay on as long asyou hold the lever toward you.

The high-beam indicator on theinstrument panel cluster will comeon. Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system comes on whenthe following conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The transmission is not in Park.. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

When the DRL system is on,only the DRL lamps are on. Thetaillamps, sidemarker, instrumentpanel lights, and other lamps willnot be on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp systemswitches from DRL to theheadlamps.

To turn off the DRL lamps, turn theexterior lamps control to the OFFposition and then release. Forvehicles first sold in Canada, thetransmission must be in the P (Park)position before the DRL lamps canbe turned off.


6-4 Lighting

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theautomatic headlamp system turnson the headlamps at the normalbrightness, along with the taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, and theinstrument panel lights. The radiolights will also be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlampsystem, turn the exterior lampsswitch to the off position and thenrelease it. For vehicles first sold inCanada, the transmission must bein the P (Park) position before theautomatic headlamp system can beturned off.

The vehicle has a light sensorlocated on the top of the instrumentpanel which regulates when theautomatic headlamps turn on. Donot cover the sensor, otherwise theheadlamps will come on wheneverthe ignition is on.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or heavy overcastweather. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automaticheadlamp systems so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect thesystem. The DRL and automaticheadlamp system are only affectedwhen the light sensor detects achange in lighting lasting longerthan the delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes approximately one minutefor the automatic headlamp systemto change to DRL if it is brightenough outside. During that delay,the instrument panel cluster may notbe as bright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness controlis in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑7.


Lighting 6-5

To idle the vehicle with theautomatic headlamp system off, turnthe control to the off position.

The headlamps will also stay onafter you exit the vehicle. Thisfeature can be programmed usingthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5‑47.

If the vehicle is not equippedwith DIC buttons, exit lightingis automatic. When it is darkenough outside, the exterior lampsremain on for 30 seconds after theignition is moved from ON/RUN toLOCK/OFF.

For vehicles without a radio, theinstrument panel light remains onfor 30 seconds with the driver doorclosed. For vehicles with a radio,the instrument panel light remainson for 10 minutes with the driverdoor closed. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑33.

The regular headlamp system canbe turned on when needed.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flashers):Press this button located on top ofthe steering column, to make thefront and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. This warns othersthat you are having trouble. Pressagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever for lessthan one second until the arrowstarts to flash to signal a lanechange. This causes the turnsignals to automatically flashthree times. It will flash six timesif tow-haul mode is active. Holdingthe turn signal lever for more thanone second will cause the turnsignals to flash until you release thelever.


6-6 Lighting

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb couldbe burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑40.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (3/4 of a mile), a chimewill sound at each flash of the turnsignal and the message TURNSIGNAL ON will also appear in theDriver Information Control (DIC).To turn the chime and message off,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

Fog Lamps

For vehicles with fog lamps, thecontrol is located next to the exteriorlamps control on the instrumentpanel, to the left of the steeringcolumn.

The ignition must be in the ON/RUNposition for the fog lamps tocome on.

# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn thefog lamps on or off. A light will comeon in the instrument panel cluster.

When the fog lamps are turned on,the parking lamps automaticallyturn on.

When the headlamps are changedto high beam, the fog lamps also gooff. When the high-beam headlampsare turned off, the fog lamps willcome on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be on withthe fog lamps.

AuxiliaryRoof-Mounted LampIf the vehicle has this feature, thisbutton includes wiring provisions fora dealer or a qualified service centerto install an auxiliary roof lamp.


Lighting 6-7

This button is located on theoverhead console.

When the wiring is connected toan auxiliary roof‐mounted lamp,pressing the bottom of the buttonwill activate the lamp and illuminatean indicator light at the bottom ofthis button. Pressing the top of thebutton will turn off the roof‐mountedlamp and indicator.

The emergency roof lamp circuitis fused at 30 amps, so the totalcurrent draw of the attached lampsshould be less than this value.The attachment points for the rooflamp circuits are two blunt cutwires located above the overheadconsole, a dark green switchedpower wire and a black ground wire.

For more information on roof mountemergency lamp installation, pleasevisit the GM Upfitter website atwww.gmupfitter.com or contact yourdealer.

If the vehicle has this button,the vehicle may have the snowplow prep package. For furtherinformation, see Adding a SnowPlow or Similar Equipment onpage 9‑94.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): This feature controlsthe brightness of the instrumentpanel lights and is located next tothe exterior lamps control.

Push the knob to extend out andthen it can be turned.


6-8 Lighting

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe instrument panel lights. Turningthe knob to the farthest clockwiseposition turns on the dome lamps.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps are located in theoverhead console.

They come on when any door isopened and turn off after all thedoors are closed.

Turn the instrument panelbrightness knob located belowthe dome lamp override button,clockwise to the farthest position tomanually turn on the dome lamps.The dome lamps remain on until theknob is turned counterclockwise.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button islocated next to the exterior lampscontrol.

k (Dome Off): Press the buttonin and the dome lamps remain offwhen a door is opened. Press thebutton again to return it to theextended position so that the domelamps come on when a door isopened.

Reading LampsFor vehicles with reading lampsthey are located on the overheadconsole.

To turn on the reading lamps, pressthe button located next to eachlamp. To turn them off, press thebutton again.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. To turn thelamps on or off, press the buttonlocated next to the lamp.

The lamps are fixed and cannot beadjusted.


Lighting 6-9

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe vehicle has an illuminated entryfeature.

When the doors are opened, thedome lamps will come on if thedome override button is in theextended position. If the domeoverride button is pressed in, thelamps will not come on.

Exit LightingThe interior lamps come on whenthe key is removed from the ignition.They turn off automatically in20 seconds. The lights do not comeon if the dome override button ispressed in.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on,such as: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speedto generate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.


6-10 Lighting

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERY LOWSTART VEHICLE . If this messagedisplays, it is recommended that thedriver reduce the electrical loads asmuch as possible and restart thevehicle. See Battery Voltage andCharging Messages on page 5‑38.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome, andreading lamps if they are left on formore than 10 minutes when theignition is off. This will keep thebattery from running down.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-3Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Rear Side WindowAntenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-13

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the roadfor extended periods couldcause a crash resulting in injuryor death to you or others. Donot give extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.


7-2 Infotainment System

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2.

This vehicle's audio system may beequipped with a noise reductionsystem which can work improperlyif the audio amplifier, enginecalibrations, exhaust system,microphones, radio, or speakers aremodified or replaced. This couldresult in more noticeable enginenoise at certain speeds.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑33 for moreinformation.

Navigation/Radio System

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the separate NavigationSystem manual.



Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

Operation

Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with USB and CD (MP3) similar



Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3)

The vehicle has one of these radiosas its audio system.

Radios with CD and DVD

Vehicles with a USB, CD, and DVDradio have a Bose® SurroundSound System. Some of its features

are explained later in this sectionunder, “Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)”.

Vehicles with a USB, CD, andDVD radio may have a Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system. SeeRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)

System on page 7‑35 for moreinformation on the vehicle's RSEsystem.

The DVD player is the top slot onthe radio faceplate. The playeris capable of reading the DTSprogrammed DVD Audio or DVDVideo media, (DTS and DTS DigitalSurround are registered trademarksof Digital Theater Systems, Inc.).

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories.

Using the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off.

Turn clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the volume.

4 (Information) (If available):Press to switch the display betweenthe radio station frequency and thetime. While the ignition is off, pressthis button to display the time. Pressto display additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS or



XM station; or CD, MP3, or WMAsong. If information is availableduring XM, CD, MP3, or WMAplayback, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available,“NO INFO” displays.

Speed Compensated Volume(SCV): Radios with SpeedCompensated Volume (SCV)automatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle's speedchanges while driving, so that thevolume level stays consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.

2. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM (automaticvolume) tab on the radio display.

4. Press the softkey under thedesired Speed CompensatedVolume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level ofradio volume compensation.The display times out afterapproximately 10 seconds. Eachhigher setting allows for moreradio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust the bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press the f knob until the tonecontrol tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired tonecontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Pressing the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press the ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK button.

. Press the\ FWD,

ors REV button.

If a station's frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the softkey positioned underthe BASS, MID, or TREB tab formore than 2 seconds. A beepsounds and the level adjusts tothe middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press the f knob for morethan 2 seconds until a beep sounds.



EQ (Equalization): Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass ortreble, returns the EQ to the manualbass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audiosystem, the EQ settings are eitherMANUAL or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): Toadjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the f knob until thespeaker control tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired speakercontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Pressing the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press the ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK button.

. Press the\ FWD,

ors REV button.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more than2 seconds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibratedfor the vehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, itmeans that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to yourdealer for service.

Locked or Loc: One of thesemessages will display when theTheftLock® system has locked upthe radio. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

For radios with the Radio DataSystem (RDS) feature, it only workswith FM stations that broadcastRDS information. This system reliesupon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only workswhen the information is available.While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters displays. In rarecases, a radio station couldbroadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features towork improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

4 (Information) (RDS Features):For vehicles with RDS features,press 4 to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS station. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of the

display and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line.When information is not available,“NO INFO” displays.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.

f (Tune): Turn to manually selectradio stations.

© SEEK: Press to seek theprevious radio station. Press andhold for a few seconds until abeep sounds to scan for radiostations in descending order,press the © SEEK button again tostop scanning radio stations. Theradio only seeks and scans stationswith a strong signal that are in theselected band.

¨ SEEK: Press to seek the nextradio station. Press and hold for afew seconds until a beep sounds toscan for radio stations in ascendingorder, press the © SEEK buttonagain to stop scanning radio

stations. The radio only seeks andscans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

s REV: Press to manually tune toa radio station in descending order.

\ FWD: Press to manually tune toa radio station in ascending order.

FAV (Favorites): Press to selectdifferent favorite pages for storedradio stations.

Storing Radio Stations

Drivers are encouraged to storeradio station while the vehicle isparked, see Defensive Driving onpage 9‑2. Tune to stored radiostations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.

Up to 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites using the6 softkeys below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theFAV button. Press the FAV buttonto go through up to 6 pages offavorites, each having 6 favoritestations available per page.



Each page of favorites can containany combination of AM, FM, or XM,if equipped, stations.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station willbe stored.

3. Press and hold one of the6 softkeys until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 tostore additional radio stations.

The number of favorites pages canbe setup using the MENU button.To setup the number of favoritespages:

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the number of favoritespages by pressing the softkeylocated below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to beginthe process of programmingfavorites.

Satellite Radio

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMSatellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A servicefee is required to receive the XMservice. If the service needs to bereactivated, the radio will display“No Subscription Please Renewon channel XM1.” For moreinformation, contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,and www.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.



4 (Information) (XM Satellite RadioService): For vehicles with XM,press 4 to display additional textinformation related to the currentXM channel. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line.When information is not available,“NO INFO” displays.

Finding a Channel

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.

f (Tune): Turn to manually selectan XM channel.

© SEEK: Press to go to theprevious XM channel.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nextXM channel.

s REV: Press to go to theprevious XM category.

\ FWD: Press to go to the nextXM category.

FAV (Favorites): Press to selectdifferent favorites pages for storedradio stations.

CAT (Category): The CAT button isused to find XM channels when theradio is in the XM mode.

Finding a Category (CAT)Station

To find XM channels in a category:

1. Press the CAT button to displaythe category tabs. Continuepressing the CAT button until thedesired category name displays.. Radios with CD and DVD

can also navigate thecategory list by pressingthe\ FWD or thes REVbuttons.

2. Press either of the two softkeysbelow the desired category tabto immediately tune to the firstXM station in that category.

To go to the previous or next XMstation in the selected category,do one of the following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press the softkey below theright or left arrows in thecategory tab.

. Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK.

3. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV button orBAND button to display thefavorites again.



Adding and Removing Categories

Categories cannot be added orremoved while the vehicle is movingfaster than 8 km/h (5 mph).

To add or remove a category:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe XM CAT tab.

3. Turn the f knob to display thecategory to add or remove.

4. Press the softkey located underthe Add or Remove tab.

To restore all removedcategories, press the softkeyunder the Restore All tab.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.

Storing XM Channels

Drivers are encouraged to storeXM channels while the vehicle isparked; see Defensive Driving onpage 9‑2. Tune to stored radiostations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.

Up to 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites usingthe six softkeys below the radiostation frequency tabs and byusing the FAV button. Press the FAVbutton to go through up to six pagesof favorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM,if equipped, stations.

Storing an XM Channel as aFavorite

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to an XM channel.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station willbe stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 tostore additional radio stations.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the number of favoritespages by pressing the softkeylocated below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or letthe menu time out, to return tothe original main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to beginthe process of programmingfavorites.



XM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels,or any others, can be blocked ata customer's request, by calling1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated,and no action is required. Thisprocess should take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station forthat preset button.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

No Subscription Please Renew:The XM subscription needs tobe reactivated. Contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.and www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiverin the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after havingthe vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM Radio eight‐digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate theservice.



Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver or antennacould have a fault. Consult withyour dealer.

Check XM Receivr: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference andstatic can occur during normalradio reception if items suchas cell phone chargers, vehicleconvenience accessories, andexternal electronic devices areplugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference orstatic, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Althoughthe radio has a built-in electroniccircuit that automatically works toreduce interference, some staticcan occur, especially around tallbuildings or hills, causing the soundto fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just aswith FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.



Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Rear Side WindowAntennaThe AM-FM antenna is located inthe passenger rear side windows.Make sure the inside surfaces of therear side windows are not scratchedand that the lines on the glass arenot damaged. If the inside surfacesare damaged, they could interferewith radio reception.

If a cellular telephone antennaneeds to be attached to the glass,make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged.There is enough space betweenthe grid lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna withoutinterfering with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the insideof the rear side windows mayaffect radio reception or damagethe rear side window antenna.Repairs would not be covered bythe warranty. Do not clear theinside of the rear side windowswith sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused tothe antenna due to metallic tintingmaterials will not be covered bythe warranty.

Satellite Radio AntennaThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the XM system(if equipped) may be affected if thesunroof is open.



Audio Players

CD Player

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD.It could get caught in the CD. If aCD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners forCDs is not advised, due to the riskof contaminating the lens of the CDoptics with lubricants internal to theCD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep

the CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “Messages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled,clean it with a soft, lint free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution mixedwith water. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Inserting a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.

Ejecting a CD

Z EJECT: Press and release toeject the disc. Remove the CDwhen Remove Disc displays. If thedisc is not removed, after severalseconds, the disc is automaticallypulled back into the player.

Playing a CD

If the ignition or radio is turned off,with a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.



The CD is controlled by the buttonson the radio faceplate or by the RSAunit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System on page 7‑45 for moreinformation.

When a CD is inserted, the CDsymbol displays on the left side ofthe radio display. As each new trackstarts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 inch) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press tocycle through CD or Auxiliary whenlistening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing the discand/or track number displays whena CD is in the player. Press againand the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary inputdevice, see, Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑30 for more information.

If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found”displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

© SEEK: Press to go to the startof the current track, if more thanten seconds on the CD have played.

Press to go to the previous track ifless than ten seconds on the CDhave played.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes to continue moving backwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes to continue moving forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track.

RDM (Random): Press to listento tracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random:

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.



MP3 Supported Files

The Radio with CD (MP3) and theRadio with USB and CD (MP3),have the capability of playing anMP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc.

Format

Radios that have the capability ofplaying MP3s can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files canbe recorded with the following fixedbit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbpsor a variable bit rate.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio can play discs thatcontain both uncompressedCD audio and MP3 files. If bothformats are on the disc, the radioreads all MP3 files first, then theuncompressed CD audio files.

CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The radio supports:. Up to 50 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 50 playlists.. Up to 255 files.. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl

extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda

file extension.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a CD display asF1 ROOT.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:. Playlists (Px).. Files stored in the root directory.. Files stored in folders in the root

directory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track

in the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracksin each playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first trackin the first folder and continuessequentially through all tracksin each folder. When the lasttrack of the last folder hasplayed, play continues fromthe first track of the first folder.



File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension ofthe filename is not displayed.

Preprogrammed Playlists

CDs that have preprogrammedplaylists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, orReal Jukebox™ software can beaccessed, however, there is noplaylist editing capability usingthe radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.

Playlists can be changed byusing the softkeys belowthe Sc andc T tabs,

the f knob, the © SEEK button or

the ¨ SEEK button. An MP3 CD-Ror CD-RW that has been recordedwithout using file folders can beplayed. If a CD-R or CD-RWcontains more than the maximumof 50 folders, 15 playlists, and512 folders and files, the playerallows access and navigates up tothe maximum, but all items over themaximum are not accessible.

Playing an MP3

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 fileson the CD currently playing.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than ten secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.



s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the file displays.Releases REV to resume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thefile displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed time ofthe file displays.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below the Sc tab togo to the first track in the previousfolder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey below thec T tab to go tothe first track in the next folder.

RDM (Random): Press to listento tracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random:

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays.


h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey below theh tab to havethe files played in order by artist oralbum. The player scans the discto sort the files by artist and albumID3 tag information. It can takeseveral minutes to scan the discdepending on the number of fileson the disc. The radio may beginplaying while it is scanning in thebackground.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goesto the next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the desired artistdisplays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey located belowthe Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theback tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.



The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrowsand songs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songsfrom that album have played, theplayer moves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

CD Player Messages

CHECK DISC: If this messagedisplays and/or the CD ejects, itcould be for one of the followingreasons:. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There could have been aproblem while burning the CD.

. The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly,for any other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

CD/DVD Player

Care of the CD and DVD Player

Do not add any label to a disc.It could get caught in the CD orDVD player. If a disc is recordedon a personal computer and adescription label is needed, trylabeling the top of the recordeddisc with a marking pen.

The use of CD/DVD lens cleanersis not advised, due to the risk ofcontaminating the lens of the opticswith lubricants internal to the CDand DVD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs and DVDs

If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, thesound quality can be reduced due toCD-R or CD-RW quality, the methodof recording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.



Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD or DVD playerscans the bottom surface of thedisc. If the surface of a disc isdamaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the disc does not playproperly or not at all. Do not touchthe bottom side of a disc whilehandling it; this could damage thesurface. Pick up discs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a disc is soiled,clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution mixedwith water. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Audio Output

Only one audio source can be heardthrough the speakers at one time.An audio source is defined as DVDslot, CD slot, XM, FM‐AM, frontauxiliary jack, USB port, or rearauxiliary jack.

Press the O button to turn the radioon. The radio can be heard throughall of the vehicle speakers.

Front seat passengers can listento the radio (AM, FM, or XM ifequipped) by pressing the BANDbutton or the DVD/CD AUX buttonto select CD slot, DVD slot, frontauxiliary input, USB port, or rearauxiliary input (if available).

If a playback device is pluggedinto the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack, USB port, or the rearauxiliary jack, the front seatpassengers are able to listento playback from this sourcethrough the vehicle speakers.

See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack”in Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑30,or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” underRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑35 for moreinformation.

In some vehicles, depending onaudio options, the rear speakerscan be muted when the RSA poweris turned on. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑45 formore information.

Inserting a Disc

Insert a disc partway into either slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the disc should begin playing.(Loading a disc into the system,depending on media type andformat, ranges from 5 to 20 secondsfor a CD, and up to 30 seconds for aDVD to begin playing.)



Ejecting a Disc

Z CD (Eject): Press andrelease to eject the disc that iscurrently playing. The CD ejectsfrom the bottom slot. A beepsounds and Ejecting Disc displays.Once the disc is ejected, RemoveDisc displays. The disc can beremoved. If the disc is not removed,after several seconds the discautomatically pulls back into theplayer.

Z DVD (Eject): Press andrelease to eject the disc that iscurrently playing in the top slot.A beep sounds and Ejecting Discdisplays.

If loading and reading of a disccannot be completed, due tounknown format, etc., and the discfails to eject, press and hold formore than five seconds to force thedisc to eject.

Playing a CD (in Either theDVD or CD Slot)

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source. TheCD is controlled by the buttons onthe radio faceplate or by the RSAunit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System on page 7‑45 for moreinformation. The DVD/CD decks(the upper slot is the DVD deckand the lower slot is the CD deck)of the radio are compatible withmost audio CDs, CD-Rs, CD-RWs,and MP3s.

When a CD is inserted, the text tabDVD or CD symbol displays on theleft side of the radio display. Aseach new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliarywhen listening to the radio. TheDVD/CD text tab and a messageshowing the track or chapternumber will display when a disc is ineither slot. Press the DVD/CD AUXbutton again and the systemautomatically searches for anauxiliary input device; see AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑30 for moreinformation. If a portable audioplayer is not connected, “No AuxInput Device” displays. If a disc is inboth the DVD slot and the CD slot,the DVD/CD AUX button cyclesbetween the two sources and doesnot indicate “No Aux Input Device.”



If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUXbutton cycles through all availableoptions, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary(if available). See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” in AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑30 or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑35 for more information.

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD(tracks only) through the remotecontrol.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line.When information is not available,“NO INFO” displays.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe disc that is currently playing.

© SEEK: Press to go to the startof the current track, if more thanfive seconds on the CD haveplayed.

Press to go to the previous track ifless than five seconds on the CDhave played.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving backwardthrough the tracks on the CD.


Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track.

RDM (Random): Press to listen totracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays.


MP3 and WMA Supported Files

Format

The radio can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio plays discs that containboth uncompressed CD audio andMP3/WMA files depending on whichslot the disc is loaded into.

The DVD player only readsuncompressed audio and ignoresMP3/WMA files on a mixedmode disc.



The CD player reads bothuncompressed audio and MP3/WMA files on a mixed mode disc.Uncompressd audio is playedbefore MP3/WMA files. Press theCAT (category) button to togglebetween uncompressed audio andMP3/WMA files.

CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The DVD player supports:. Up to 255 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 15 playlists.. Up to 40 sessions.. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl


file extension.

The CD player supports:. Up to 512 files and folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl


file extension.

Root Directory

The root directory of the disc istreated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays asF1 ROOT on the radio.

If a disc contains bothuncompressed CD audio andMP3/WMA files, a folder under theroot directory called CD accessesall of the CD audio tracks onthe disc.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

No Folder

When the disc contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder functiondoes not function on a disc that wasrecorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of thefolder, the radio displays ROOT.

When the disc contains onlyplaylists and compressed audiofiles, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. Thefolder down and the folder upbuttons search playlists first andthen go to the root folder. Whenthe radio displays the name of thefolder, the radio displays ROOT.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:. Playlists (Px).. Files stored in the root directory.. Files stored in folders in the root

directory.



Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracksin each playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen asthe default display. The new trackname displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or 4 pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the file name do not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed; however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treatedas special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.

Playing an MP3 or WMA (inEither the DVD or CD Slot)

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD(tracks only).

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMAfiles.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than five secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times, if less thanfive seconds have played, tocontinue moving backward throughtracks.


Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving forwardthrough tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly.



\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below the Sc tab togo to the first track in the previousfolder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey below thec T tab to go tothe first track in the next folder.

RDM (Random): Press to listen totracks in random, rather thansequential order.

To use random:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays

2. Press the same softkey again toturn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey below theh tab to playfiles in order by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goesto the next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the artist displays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey below the SortBy tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe Album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrows,and songs from the current albumbegin to play. Once all songsfrom that album have played, theplayer moves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.



Using the DVD Player

The DVD player can be controlledby the buttons on the remotecontrol, the RSA system, or by thebuttons on the radio faceplate. See“Remote Control” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑35 and Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑45 formore information.

The DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate regioncode printed on the jacket ofmost DVDs.

The DVD slot of the radio iscompatible with most audio CDsand CD-R/RW, DVD-Video,DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, andDVD+R/RW media, along withMP3 and WMA formats.

If an error message displays onthe video screen or the radio, see“DVD Display Error Messages”under, Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System on page 7‑35, and“CD/DVD Player Messages” later inthis section for more information.

Inserting a Disc

Insert a disc partway into the topslot, label side up. The player pullsit in and the disc should beginplaying. “Loading Disc” showson the radio display. At the sametime, the radio displays a softkeymenu of option(s). Some discsautomatically play the movie whileothers default to the softkey menudisplay, which requires the Play,Enter, or Navigation softkeys to bepressed, either by softkey or bythe rear seat passenger using theremote control.

Loading a disc into the system,depending on media type andformat, ranges from 5 to 20 secondsfor a CD, and up to 30 seconds fora DVD.

Ejecting a Disc

Z DVD (Eject): Press andrelease to eject the disc currentlyplaying in the top slot. A beepsounds and Ejecting Disc displays.

If loading and reading of a disccannot be completed, due tounknown format, etc., and the discfails to eject, press and hold formore than five seconds to force thedisc to eject.

Playing a DVD

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliarywhen listening to the radio. TheDVD/CD text tab and a messageshowing the track or chapternumber will display when a disc is ineither slot. Press the DVD/CD AUXbutton again and the systemautomatically searches for anauxiliary input device; see AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑30 for moreinformation. If a portable audioplayer is not connected, “No AuxInput Device” displays. If a disc is inboth the DVD slot and the CD slot,the DVD/CD AUX button cyclesbetween the two sources and doesnot indicate “No Aux Input Device.”



If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUXbutton cycles through all availableoptions, such as: DVD slot, CDslot, front auxiliary, and rearauxiliary (if available). See “Usingthe Auxiliary Input Jack” in AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑30 or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑35 for more information.

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD(tracks only) through the remotecontrol.

O (Power): Press to turn theradio on or off. Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the volume. Press andhold for more than two seconds toturn off the entire radio and RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) systemand to start the Parental Controlfeature. Parental Control prevents

the rear seat occupant fromoperating the Rear Seat Audio(RSA) system or remote control.

A lock symbol displays next to theclock display. The Parental Controlfeature remains on until the knob ispressed and held for more thantwo seconds again, or until thedriver turns the ignition off and exitsthe vehicle.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks ona CD or DVD.

© SEEK: Press to return to thestart of the current track or chapter.Press again to go to the previoustrack or chapter. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack or chapter. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Press toquickly reverse the CD or DVD atfive times the normal speed. To stopfast reversing, press again. Thisbutton might not work when theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressto fast forward the CD or DVD atfive times the normal speed. To stopfast forwarding, press again. Thisbutton might not work when theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-V(Video)

Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several taboptions for playback. Press thesoftkey located under any tab optionduring DVD-V playback.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe Play or Pause tab displayed onthe radio, to toggle between pausingor restarting playback of a DVD.



If the forward arrow is showing onthe display, the system is in pausemode. If the Pause tab is showingon the display, the system is inplayback mode. If the DVD screenis off, press the play button to turnthe screen on.

Some DVDs begin playing after thepreviews have finished, althoughthere could be a delay of up to30 seconds. If the DVD doesnot begin playing the movieautomatically, press the softkeylocated under the play/pausesymbol tag displayed on the radio.If the DVD still does not play, referto the on-screen instructions,if available.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press to select thechoices that are highlighted inany menu.

y (Menu): Press to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thesoftkeys located under thenavigation arrows to navigate thecursor through the DVD menu.After making a selection press thisbutton. This button only operateswhen using a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when a DVD isplaying and a menu is active.

The rear seat passenger cannavigate the DVD-V and DVD-Amenus and controls through theremote control. See “RemoteControl” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑35 for more information.

The video screen automaticallyturns on when the DVD-V isinserted into the DVD slot, anddoes not automatically power onwhen the DVD-A is inserted intothe DVD slot. It must be manuallyturned on by the rear seat occupantthrough the remote control powerbutton.

Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-A(Audio)

Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several taboptions for playback. Press thesoftkey located under any tab optionduring DVD-A playback.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe play or pause icon displayed onthe radio, to toggle between pausingor restarting playback of a DVD.If the forward arrow is showing onthe display, the system is in pausemode. If the pause tab is showingon the display, the system is inplayback mode.



q Group r : Press to cyclethrough musical groupings on theDVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

e (Audio Stream): Press to cyclethrough audio stream formatslocated on the DVD-A disc. Thevideo screen shows the audiostream changing.

The rear seat passenger cannavigate the DVD-V and DVD-Amenus and controls through theremote control. See “RemoteControl” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑35 for more information.The video screen automaticallyturns on when the DVD-V isinserted into the DVD slot, anddoes not automatically power onwhen the DVD-A is inserted intothe DVD slot. It must be manuallyturned on by the rear seat occupantthrough the remote control powerbutton.

Stopping and ResumingPlayback

To stop playing a DVD withoutturning off the system, pressthe c button on the remote control,or press the softkey located underthe c or the r / j tabs displayedon the radio. If the radio is sourcedto something other than DVD-V,press the DVD/CD AUX button tomake DVD-V the active source.

To resume DVD playback, pressthe r / j button on the remotecontrol, or press the softkey locatedunder the r / j tab on the radio.The DVD should resume play fromwhere it last stopped if the dischas not been ejected and the stopbutton has not been pressed twiceon the remote control. If the dischas been ejected or the stop buttonhas been pressed twice on theremote control, the disc resumesplaying at the beginning of the disc.

CD/DVD Player Messages

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is present whentheZ or DVD/CD AUX button ispressed on the radio.

Optical Error: This messagedisplays if the disc was insertedupside down.

Disk Read Error: This messagedisplays if a disc was inserted withan invalid or unknown format.



Player Error: This messagedisplays if there are disc load ordisc eject problems.. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the disc should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, thedisc should play.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in theCD/DVD player.

If the disc is not playing correctly,for any other reason, try a knowngood disc.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

Radios with an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of thefaceplate can connect to an externalaudio device such as an iPod®,MP3 player, CD player, for use asanother source for audio listening.This input jack is not an audiooutput; do not plug headphones intothe front auxiliary input jack.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑2for more information on driverdistraction.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, pressthe radio CD/AUX button to beginplaying audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

For optimal sound quality, increasethe portable audio device's volumeto the loudest level.

It is always best to power theportable audio device through itsown battery while playing.

O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the volume of theportable player. Additional volumeadjustments might have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing.



CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD when a portable audiodevice is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audiofrom the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary):Press to cycle through DVD, CD,or Auxiliary when listening to theradio. The DVD/CD text tab and amessage showing track or chapternumber displays when a disc is ineither slot. Press again and thesystem automatically searches foran auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portableaudio player is not connected, “NoAux Input Device” displays. If a discis in both the DVD slot and the CDslot the DVD/CD AUX button cyclesbetween the two sources and notindicate “No Aux Input Device”.

If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUXbutton cycles through all availableoptions, such as: DVD slot, CDslot, Front Auxiliary, and RearAuxiliary (if available). See “Usingthe Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” in thissection, or “Audio/Video (A/V)Jacks” under, Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑35 for more information.

Using the USB Port

Radios with a USB port can controla USB storage device or an iPodusing the radio buttons and knobs.

USB Support

The USB connector is located inthe center console, and uses theUSB 2.0 standard.

USB Supported Devices. USB Flash Drives. Portable USB Hard Drives. Fifth generation or later iPod. iPod nanos. iPod touch. iPod classic

Not all iPods and USB Drives arecompatible with the USB port.

Make sure the iPod has thelatest firmware from Apple®

for proper operation. iPod firmwarecan be updated using the latestiTunes® application. Seewww.apple.com/itunes.

For help with identifying your iPod,go to www.apple.com/support.

Radios that have a USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files that arestored on a USB storage device aswell as AAC files that are stored onan iPod.



USB Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 700 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes.. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file

extension.. AAC files stored on an iPod.. FAT16. FAT32

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod

The USB Port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated in the center console or onthe instrument panel.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port located in thecenter console. If the vehicle is onand the USB connection works,“OK to disconnect” and a GM logomay appear on the iPod and iPodappears on the radio display. TheiPod music appears on the radio’sdisplay and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off and willnot charge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the AuxiliaryInput Jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” earlier for moreinformation.

Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs and displaysong information on the radio’sdisplay.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than ten secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press andhold to reverse playback quickly.Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Releases REV to resumeplaying. The elapsed time of the filedisplays.



\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at areduced volume. Release\ FWDto resume playing. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.

Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below thetab with the function on it to usethat function.

j (Pause): Press the softkeybelow j to pause the track. Thetab appears raised when pauseis being used. Press the softkeybelow j again to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theback tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folder on theUSB drive. To browse and selectfiles:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the desiredfolder. If there is more then onefolder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 untilthe desired folder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the filesin the selected folder.

5. Press f to select the desired fileto be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% throughthe list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.



h (Music Navigator): Pressthe softkey belowh to view andselect a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres. Songs. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select thedesired menu.

4. Turn f to scroll through thefolders or files in theselected menu.

5. Press f to select the desired fileto be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% throughthe list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks. Thetab appears lowered when RepeatAll is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.



Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,< or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): Press thesoftkey below2 to turn shuffleoff. This is the default mode when aUSB storage device or iPod is firstconnected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs / ShuffleSongs): Press the softkey below= or< to shuffle all songs onthe USB storage device or iPod.

< (Shuffle Album): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.

Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) SystemThe vehicle may have anOverhead DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system.The RSE system works with thevehicle's audio system. The DVDplayer is part of the front radio. TheRSE system includes a radio with aDVD player, a video display screen,and if the vehicle has a third rowseat, it could have a second videodisplay screen, audio/video jacks,two wireless headphones, and aremote control. See CD/DVD Playeron page 7‑19 for more informationon the vehicle's DVD system.

Before Driving

The RSE is designed for rear seatpassengers only. The driver cannotsafely view the video screen whiledriving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weatherconditions, the RSE system mightnot work until the temperature iswithin the operating range. Theoperating range for the RSE systemis above −20°C (−4°F) or below60°C (140°F). If the temperature ofthe vehicle is outside this range,heat or cool the vehicle until thetemperature is within the operatingrange of the RSE system.

Parental Control

The RSE system may have aParental Control feature, dependingon which radio the vehicle has. Tostart Parental Control, press andhold the radio power button for morethan two seconds to stop all systemfeatures such as: radio, videoscreen, Rear Seat Audio (RSA),DVD, and/or CD. While ParentalControl is on, a padlock icondisplays.



The radio can be turned back onwith a single press of the powerbutton, but the RSE system willremain under Parental Control.

To turn Parental Control off, pressand hold the radio power button formore than two seconds. The RSEreturns from where it was previouslyleft and the padlock icon disappearsfrom the radio display.

Parental Control can also be turnedoff by inserting or ejecting any disc,pressing the play icon on the radioDVD display menu, or changing anignition position.

Headphones

A. Battery cover

B. Channel 1 or 2 switch

C. Power button

D. Volume control

E. Power indicator light

The RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones that arededicated to this system. Channel 1is dedicated to the video screen,while Channel 2 is dedicated toRear Seat Audio (RSA) selections.

These headphones can be used tolisten to the radio, CDs, DVDs,MP3s, DVD‐As, or any auxiliarysource connected to A/V jacks orthe auxiliary input jack, if the vehiclehas this feature. The wirelessheadphones have an On/Off button,channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volumecontrol.

If the vehicle has a third row videoscreen display, it has two additionalheadphones.

Push the power button to turn onthe headphones. An indicator lightlocated on the headphones comeson. If the light comes on, but thereis intermittent sound and/or static onthe headphones, or if the indicatorlight does not come on, the batteriesmight need to be replaced. See“Battery Replacement” later in thissection for more information. Switchthe headphones to Off when notin use.



Infrared transmitters are located atthe rear of the overhead console.The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system and RSAare shut off, or if the headphonesare out of range of the transmittersfor more than three minutes. If youmove too far forward or step out ofthe vehicle, the headphones losethe audio signal.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volume controllocated on the right side.

For optimal audio performance, theheadphones must be worn correctly.Headphones should be worn withthe headband over the top of thehead for best audio reception.

The symbol L (Left) appears on theoutside bottom edge of the ear cupand should be positioned on the leftear. The symbol R (Right) appearson the outside bottom edge of theear cup and should be positioned onthe right ear.

Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damagethe headphones and repairs willnot be covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool, dryplace.

If the foam ear pads attached tothe headphones become worn ordamaged, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set.To purchase replacement ear pads,call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then promptzero (0), or contact your dealer.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries on theheadphones:

1. Turn the screw to loosen thebattery door located on the leftside of the headphones. Slidethe battery door open.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery door andtighten the door screw.

If the headphones are to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.



Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

A. Yellow: Video Input

B. White: Left Audio Input

C. Red: Right Audio Input

The A/V jacks are color coded tomatch typical home entertainmentsystem equipment.

The A/V jacks, located on the rearof the floor console, allow audioor video signals to be connectedfrom an auxiliary device suchas a camcorder or a video game

unit to the RSE system. Adapterconnectors or cables (not included)may be required to connect theauxiliary device to the A/V jacks.Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for proper usage.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system, connect an externalauxiliary device to the color-codedA/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen poweron. If the video screen is in the DVDplayer mode, pressing the AUX(auxiliary) button on the remotecontrol switches the video screenfrom the DVD player mode to theauxiliary device. The audio of theconnected source can be listened toover the speakers by sourcing theradio to the auxiliary device or bysourcing the RSA to the Rear Auxand listening with the wirelessheadphones on Channel 2 or withthe wired headphones. See “Using

the Auxiliary Input Jack” underAuxiliary Devices on page 7‑30 formore information about changingthe source.

How to Change the RSE VideoScreen Settings

The screen display mode (normal,full, and zoom), screen brightness,and setup menu language can bechanged from the on screen setupmenu. To change any feature:

1. Press the z (display menu)button on the remote control.

2. Use the remote control n,q,p,o (navigation) arrows andther (enter) button to use thesetup menu.

3. Press the z button again toremove the setup menu from thescreen.



Audio Output

Audio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following possiblesources:. Wireless headphones. Vehicle speakers. Vehicle‐wired headphone jacks

on the RSA system, if thevehicle has this feature.

The RSE system always transmitsthe audio signal to the wirelessheadphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlierin this section for more information.

The DVD player is capable ofoutputting audio to the wiredheadphone jacks on the RSAsystem, if the vehicle has thisfeature. The DVD player can beselected as an audio source on theRSA system. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑45 formore information.

When a device is connected to theA/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliaryinput jack if the vehicle has thisfeature, the rear seat passengersare able to hear audio from theauxiliary device through the wirelessor wired headphones. The front seatpassengers are able to listen toplayback from this device throughthe vehicle speakers by selectingAUX as the source on the radio.

Video Screen(s)

The video screen(s) are located inthe overhead console.

To use the video screen(s):

1. Push the release button locatedon the overhead console.

2. Move the screen to the desiredposition.

When the video screen is not inuse, push it up into its lockedposition.

If a DVD is playing and the screenis raised to its locked position, thescreen remains on. This is normal,and the DVD continues to playthrough the previous audio source.Use the remote control power buttonor eject the disc to turn off thescreen.

The overhead console contains theinfrared transmitters for the wirelessheadphones and the infraredreceivers for the remote control.They are located at the rear of theconsole.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage mayoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreen” later in this section formore information.



Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim it atthe transmitter window at the rearof the RSE overhead console andpress the desired button. Directsunlight or very bright light couldaffect the ability of the RSEtransmitter to receive signalsfrom the remote control. If theremote control does not seem tobe working, the batteries mightneed to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section.

Objects blocking the line of sightcould also affect the function of theremote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVDslot, the remote control O (power)button can be used to turn on thevideo screen display and start thedisc. The radio can also turn on thevideo screen display. See CD/DVDPlayer on page 7‑19 for moreinformation.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.

If the remote control becomeslost or damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.If this happens, make sure theuniversal remote control uses acode set of Toshiba®.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button toturn the video screen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press this buttonto turn the remote control backlighton. The backlight automaticallytimes out after 7 to 10 seconds if noother button is pressed while thebacklight is on.

v (Title): Press this button toreturn the DVD to the main menu ofthe DVD. This function could varyfor each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press this buttonto access the DVD menu. The DVDmenu is different on every DVD.Use the navigation arrows to movethe cursor around the DVD menu.After making a selection pressthe enter button. This button onlyoperates when using a DVD.

n,q, p,o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.



r (Enter): Press this button toselect the choice that is highlightedin any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press thisbutton to adjust the brightness,screen display mode (normal,full, or zoom), and display thelanguage menu.

q (Return): Press this button toexit the current active menu andreturn to the previous menu. Thisbutton operates only when thedisplay menu or a DVD menu isactive.

c (Stop): Press this button tostop playing, fast reversing, or fastforwarding a DVD. Press this buttontwice to return to the beginning ofthe DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press thisbutton to start playing a DVD. Pressthis button while a DVD is playing topause it. Press it again to continueplaying the DVD.

While the DVD is playing, the DVDcan be played slowly by pressingthe play/pause button then pressingthe fast forward button. The DVDcontinues playing in a slow playmode. Also, reverse can be playedslowly by pressing the play/pausebutton and then pressing the fastreverse button. To cancel slow playmode, press the play/pause button.

t (Previous Track/Chapter):Press this button to return to thestart of the current track or chapter.Press this button again to go to theprevious track or chapter. Thisbutton might not work when theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Pressthis button to go to the beginningof the next chapter or track. Thisbutton might not work while theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press thisbutton to quickly reverse the DVD orCD. To stop fast reversing a DVDvideo, press the play/pause button.To stop fast reversing a DVD audioor CD, release the fast reversebutton. This button might not workwhen the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press thisbutton to fast forward the DVD orCD. To stop fast forwarding a DVDvideo, press the play/pause button.To stop fast forwarding a DVD audioor CD, release the fast forwardbutton. This button might not workwhile the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

e (Audio): Press this button tochange audio tracks on DVDs thathave this feature when the DVD isplaying. The format and content ofthis function vary for each disc.



{ (Subtitles): Press this button toturn on or off subtitles and to movethrough subtitle options when aDVD is playing. The format andcontent of this function vary foreach disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this buttonto switch the system between theDVD player and an auxiliary source.

If the vehicle has a third row videoscreen, the AUX button controls thesource display on the second rowvideo screen, and the third rowvideo screen as described in thetable below:

AuxButtonPress

SecondRow

Screen

Third RowScreen

DefaultState (NoPress)

DVDMedia

DVDMedia

FirstPress

Aux VideoSource

Aux VideoSource

SecondPress

DVDMedia

Aux VideoSource

AuxButtonPress

SecondRow

Screen

Third RowScreen

ThirdPress

Aux VideoSource

DVDMedia

FourthPress

Return toDefaultState

Return toDefaultState

2 (Camera): Press this button tochange camera angles on DVDsthat have this feature while a DVD isplaying. The format and content ofthis function vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numeric keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.

\ (Clear): Press this button withinthree seconds after entering anumeric selection, to clear allnumerical inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Pressthis button to select chapter or tracknumbers greater than nine. Pressthis button before entering thenumber.

Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries:

1. Slide the rear cover back on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure theyare installed correctly using thediagram on the inside of theremote control.

3. Replace the battery cover.

If the remote control is to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

There is no power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY.

The picture does not fill the screen. There are blackborders on the top and bottom or on both sides, or thepicture looks stretched out.

Check the display mode settings in the setup menu bypressing the display menu button on the remote control.

In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction betweenthe remote control and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead orinstalled incorrectly.

After stopping the player, and pushing Play, sometimesthe DVD starts where it left off and sometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button was pressed one time, the DVD playerresumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If thestop button was pressed two times, the DVD playerbegins to play from the beginning of the DVD.

The auxiliary source is running, but there is no picture orsound.

Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliarysource mode.Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont.)

Problem Recommended Action

Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out orbuzzes.

Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,and interference from cellular telephone towers, or use acellular telephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones are on correctly using theL (left) and R (right) on the headphones.

The remote and/or the headphones are lost. See your dealer for assistance.

The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVDplayer.

DVD Display Error Messages

The DVD display error messagedepends on the radio that is in thevehicle. The video screen candisplay one of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: Thismessage displays when there aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is presentwhenZ or DVD AUX is pressedon the radio.

DVD Distortion

Video distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile faxmachines, or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.



Cleaning the RSE OverheadConsole

When cleaning the RSE overheadconsole surface, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video Screen

When cleaning the video screen,use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whendirectly touching or cleaning thescreen, as damage could result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)SystemVehicles with this feature allowthe rear seat passengers to listento and control any of the musicsources: radio, CDs, DVDs, orother auxiliary sources. However,the rear seat passengers canonly control the music sourcesthe front seat passengers are notlistening to (except on some radioswhere dual control is allowed).

For example, rear seat passengerscan control and listen to a CDthrough the headphones, while thedriver listens to the radio throughthe front speakers. The rear seatpassengers have control of thevolume for each set of headphones.

The radio functionality is controlledby both the RSA and the front radio.Only one band can be tuned to atone time. Changing the band on theRSA or the front radio will changethe band on the other system,if they are both sourced to the radio.

The RSA functions operate evenwhen the main radio is off. Thefront audio system will display theheadphone icon when the RSA ison, and will disappear from thedisplay when it is off.

Audio can be heard through wiredheadphones (not included) pluggedinto the jacks on the RSA. If thevehicle has this feature, audio canalso be heard on Channel 2 of thewireless headphones.

The audio system mutes the rearspeakers when the RSA audio isactive through the headphones.

P (Power): Press theP button toturn the RSA on or off.

Volume: Turn this knob to increaseor to decrease the volume of thewired headphones. The left knobcontrols the left headphones andthe right knob controls the rightheadphones.

SRCE (Source): Press thisbutton to switch between the radio(AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped),CD, and if the vehicle has thesefeatures, DVD, front auxiliary, andrear auxiliary.



© ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM,AM, or XM™ (if equipped), pressthe left © or right ¨ seek arrow to goto the previous or to the next stationor channel and stay there. Thisfunction is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the radio.

Press and hold the left © or

right ¨ seek arrow until the displayflashes, to tune to an individualstation. The display stops flashingafter the buttons have not beenpushed for more than two seconds.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the radio.

While listening to a disc, press theleft © seek arrow to go back to thestart of the current track or chapter(if more than ten seconds haveplayed). Press the right ¨ seekarrow to go to the next track orchapter on the disc. This function isinactive, with some radios, if thefront seat passengers are listeningto the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press the left © or

right ¨ seek arrow to perform acursor up or down on the menu.Hold the left © or right ¨ arrow toperform a cursor left or right onthe menu.

PROG (Program): Press thisbutton to go to the next preset radiostation or channel set on the mainradio. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to theradio.

When a CD or DVD audio disc isplaying, press this button to go tothe beginning of the CD or DVDaudio. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a disc is playing in the CD orDVD changer, press this button toselect the next disc, if multiple discsare loaded. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press the PROG buttonto perform the menu function, enter.



Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the systemcan interact with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentand navigation system.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list.See “Voice Pass-Thru” in thissection for more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long ortoo often could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth‐capable cell phone witha Hands‐Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the key is in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones are guaranteedto work with the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem. See www.gm.com/bluetoothfor more information on compatiblephones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.



When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein‐vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeSteering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 for more information.

b g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and startspeech recognition.

cx (Phone On Hook): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Pairing

A Bluetooth cell phone must bepaired to the Bluetooth system andthen connected to the vehicle beforeit can be used. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar Hands‐Free Calling,if equipped. Refer to the OnStarOwner's Guide for more information.

Pairing Information. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. Pairing only needs to be

completed once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.



Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seethe cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN that was provided in Step 3.After the PIN is successfullyentered, the system prompts youto provide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected to the

vehicle. See “Listing All Pairedand Connected Phones” later inthis section for more information.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.



3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Dependingon which cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response willbe “<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.



Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tags inthe Hands‐Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the system

repeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”



Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allowsa phone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”




Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b g to answer the call.

. Presscx to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b g again to return to theoriginal call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Presscx to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Presscx to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b g, andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b g, andthen say “Un‐mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.



Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle,use the audio transfer feature onthe cell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” The systemresponds “Bluetooth ready,”followed by a tone.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu‐driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.



Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags inthe phone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Rear Climate Control System(Rear ClimateControl Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Rear Climate Control System(Rear Climate with Rear SeatAudio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Fan Control

B. REAR (Rear Climate Control)

C. Recirculation

D. Air Delivery Mode Control

E. Air Conditioning

F. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

G. Rear Window Defogger

Temperature Control: Movethe thumbwheels up or downto increase or decrease thetemperature on the driver sideor the passenger side of the vehiclefor the dual zone system.


8-2 Climate Controls

9 (Fan Control): Turn the leftknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the fanspeed. Turn the knob all the waycounterclockwise to turn the frontsystem off.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the airflow direction insidethe vehicle. By positioning the knobbetween two modes, a combinationof those modes is selected.

Select from the following modes:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtowards the windshield and sidewindow outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some of the airdirected to the windshield, sidewindow, and second row flooroutlets. In this mode, the systemautomatically selects outside air.Recirculation cannot be selectedwhen in Floor Mode.

- (Defog): The defog mode isused to clear the windows of fogor moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield, floor outlets, and sidewindow vents. In this mode, thesystem turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning compressorunless the outside temperature isclose to freezing. The recirculationmode cannot be selected while inthe defog mode.

0 (Defrost): The defrost modeis used to remove fog or frost fromthe windshield more quickly. Air isdirected to the windshield and sidewindow vents, with some directedto the floor vents. In this mode, thesystem automatically forces outsideair into the vehicle. The recirculationmode cannot be selected whilein the defrost mode. The airconditioning compressor runsautomatically in this setting, unlessthe outside temperature is close tofreezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

# (Air Conditioning): Press thisbutton to turn the air conditioningsystem on or off. An indicatorlight comes on to show that theair conditioning is on. The airconditioning can be selected inany mode as long as the fan switchis on.



On hot days, open the windows tolet hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps to reduce the timeit takes for the vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, soa small amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.

h (Recirculation): Press thisbutton to turn the recirculation modeon or off. An indicator light comeson to show that recirculation is on.

This mode recirculates and helpsto quickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to helpprevent outside air and odors fromentering the vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defrost, or defoggingmodes. If recirculation is selectedwhile in one of those modes, theindicator flashes three times andturns off. The air conditioningcompressor will also come onwhen this mode is activated. Whilein recirculation mode the windowsmay fog when the weather is coldand damp. To clear the fog, selecteither the defog or defrost modeand increase the fan speed. Therecirculation mode can also beturned off by turning off the engine.

REAR: Press to turn the rearheating and air conditioning on. SeeRear Climate Control System (RearClimate Control Only) on page 8‑10or Rear Climate Control System(Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio)on page 8‑11 for more information.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. Thesystem automatically turns offseveral minutes after it has beenactivated. The defogger can also beturned off by turning off the engine.Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, the mirrors willheat to help clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirror whenthe rear window defog button ispressed.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal, or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.



Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system. The vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation systemdescribed later in this section.

If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the hybrid supplement for more information.

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

C. Defrost

D. Recirculation

E. REAR (Rear Climate Control)

F. Air Delivery Mode Control

G. Driver Temperature Control

H. Display

I. Power Button

J. Rear Window Defogger

K. Air Conditioning

L. PASS

M. Passenger Temperature Control

O (On/Off): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.Outside air still enters the vehicle,and is directed to the floor. Thisdirection can be changed bypressing the mode button.Recirculation can be selected onceyou have selected vent or bi-levelmode. The temperature can also beadjusted using either temperaturebutton. If the air delivery mode ortemperature settings are adjustedwith the system off, the displayilluminates briefly to show thesettings and then returns to off. Thesystem can be turned back on bypressing either O, D, C,#, thedefrost or the AUTO button.



Driver and Passenger SideTemperature Control

The driver and passenger sidetemperature buttons are used toadjust the temperature of the aircoming through the system on thedriver or passenger side of thevehicle. The temperature can beadjusted even if the system isturned off. This is possible sinceoutside air always flows throughthe system as the vehicle ismoving forward unless it isset to recirculation mode. See“Recirculation” later in this section.

Press the + or − buttons to increaseor decrease the cabin temperature.The driver side or passenger sidetemperature display shows thetemperature setting decreasing orincreasing.

The passenger temperaturesetting can be set to match thedriver temperature setting bypressing the PASS button andturning off the PASS indicator.

When the passenger temperaturesetting is set different than the driversetting, the indicator on the PASSbutton illuminates and both thedriver side and passenger sidetemperature displays are shown.

When in defrost mode thepassenger temperature settingcannot be changed.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Whenautomatic operation is active thesystem will control the insidetemperature, the air delivery, andthe fan speed.

Use the steps below to place theentire system in automatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.

When AUTO is selected, thedisplay will change to showthe current temperature(s) andAUTO will be lit on the display.The current delivery mode andfan speed will also be displayedfor approximately 5 seconds.

When AUTO is selected, theair conditioning operation andair inlet will be automaticallycontrolled. The air conditioningcompressor will run when theoutside temperature is overabout 4°C (40°F). The air inletwill normally be set to outsideair. If it is hot outside, the airinlet may automatically switchto recirculate inside air to helpquickly cool down the vehicle.The light on the button comes onin recirculation.

2. Set the driver and passengertemperature.

To find your comfort setting,start with a 23°C (74°F)temperature setting and allowabout 20 minutes for the systemto regulate. Use the driver orpassenger temperature buttonsto adjust the temperature settingas necessary. If a temperaturesetting of 15°C (60°F) is chosen,the system remains at themaximum cooling setting.



If a temperature settingof 32°C (90°F) is chosen, thesystem remains at the maximumheat setting. Choosing eithermaximum setting will not causethe vehicle to heat or cool anyfaster.

Do not to cover the solar sensorlocated on the top of the instrumentpanel near the windshield. Thissensor regulates air temperaturebased on sun load and also turnson the headlamps. For moreinformation on the solar sensor,see “Sensors” later in this section.

To avoid blowing cold air in coldweather, the system will delayturning on the fan until warm airis available. The length of delaydepends on the engine coolanttemperature. Pressing the fanswitch will override this delay andchange the fan to a selected speed.

Manual Operation

D C (Fan Control): Press thesebuttons to increase or decrease thefan speed.

Pressing either fan button while inautomatic control places the fanunder manual control. The fansetting remains displayed andthe AUTO light turns off. The airdelivery mode remains underautomatic control.

H G (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press these buttons to change thedirection of the airflow in the vehicle.Repeatedly press either button untilthe desired mode appears on thedisplay. Pressing either mode buttonwhile the system is off changes theair delivery mode without turning thesystem on. Pressing either modebutton while in automatic controlplaces the mode under manualcontrol.

The air delivery mode setting isdisplayed and the AUTO lightturns off. The fan remains underautomatic control.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtowards the windshield and sidewindow outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some to thewindshield, side window outlets,and second row floor outlets. In thismode, the system automaticallyselects outside air.



- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.In this mode, the system turnsoff recirculation and runs the airconditioning compressor unlessthe outside temperature is close tofreezing. The recirculation modecannot be selected while in thedefog mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode removesfog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window vents,with some directed to the floorvents. In this mode, the systemautomatically forces outside airinto the vehicle and runs the airconditioning compressor unlessthe outside temperature is close tofreezing. The recirculation modecannot be selected while in thedefrost mode.

The passenger temperaturecontrol cannot be activated while indefrost mode. If the PASS button ispressed, the button indicator flashesthree times and will not work. If thepassenger temperature buttons areadjusted, the driver temperatureindicator changes. The passengertemperature will not be displayed.

If vent, bi-level, or floor mode isselected again, the climate controlsystem displays the previoustemperature settings.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

# (Air Conditioning): Pressto turn the air conditioning (A/C)compressor on and off. An indicatorlight comes on to show that the airconditioning is on.

If this button is pressed when theair conditioning compressor isunavailable, the indicator flashesthree times and then turns off. Ifthe air conditioning is on and theoutside temperature drops below atemperature which is too cool for airconditioning to be effective, the airconditioning light turns off to showthat the air conditioning mode hasbeen canceled.

On hot days, open the windows longenough to let hot inside air escape.This helps to reduce the time ittakes for the vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, soa small amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.



@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. Anindicator light comes on to showthat the recirculation is on.

This mode recirculates and helpsto quickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to helpprevent outside air and odors fromentering the vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannotbe used with floor, defog, ordefrost modes. If recirculationis selected with one of thosemodes, the indicator light flashesthree times and then turns off. Theair conditioning compressor alsocomes on when this mode isactivated. While in recirculationmode the windows may fog whenthe weather is cold and damp.

To clear the fog, select either thedefog or defrost mode and increasethe fan speed.

The recirculation mode can also beturned off by turning off the ignition.

REAR: For vehicles with the rearheat and air conditioning controls.Press to turn the rear climate controlsystem on or off. See Rear ClimateControl System (Rear ClimateControl Only) on page 8‑10 or RearClimate Control System (RearClimate with Rear Seat Audio) onpage 8‑11.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. It automaticallyturns off several minutes after it hasbeen activated. The defogger canalso be turned off by turning off theengine. Do not drive the vehicle untilall the windows are clear.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Heated Mirrors: Press< to helpclear fog or frost from the surfaceof the outside mirror. See PowerMirrors on page 2‑18.



Sensors

The solar sensor, located in thedefrost grille in the middle of theinstrument panel, monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.

The interior temperature sensorslocated in the headliner above thedriver side seat and if equipped, inthe headliner above the second rowseats measure the temperature ofthe air inside the vehicle.

There is also an exteriortemperature sensor located behindthe front grille. This sensor readsthe outside air temperature andhelps maintain the temperatureinside the vehicle. Any cover on thefront of the vehicle could cause afalse reading in the displayedtemperature.

The climate control system uses theinformation from these sensors tomaintain your comfort setting byadjusting the outlet temperature, fanspeed, and the air delivery mode.The system may also supply coolerair to the side of the vehicle facingthe sun. The recirculation mode willalso be used as needed to maintaincool outlet temperatures.



Rear Climate Control System (Rear ClimateControl Only)For vehicles with this system, the rear controls are three knobs located inthe headliner. The system can also be controlled with the front controls.

A. Fan Control

B. Temperature Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

REAR: Press the REAR button onthe front climate control system toturn the rear climate control systemon or off. An indicator comes onwhen the rear system is on.

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 or Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8‑4. Therear system can also be turnedoff by turning the rear fan knob tothe9 position.

Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control airflow settings.It comes on when REAR is pressedthe first time.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings of therear controls. It comes on whenany rear control is adjusted.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease theairflow temperature into thepassenger area.

Fan Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the direction of the airflow.

H (Vent): Air is directed throughthe headliner outlets.



) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the floor and headlineroutlets. The rear system flooroutlets are located directly behindthe second row seats. The flow canbe divided between vent and flooroutlets depending upon where theknob is placed between the settings.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets. The rear system flooroutlets are located directly behindthe second row seats.

Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with RearSeat Audio)For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls, they areintegrated with the rear seat audio controls located in the center console.The system can be controlled from the front controls as well as the rearcontrols.

Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Control

C. Temperature Control

REAR: Press the REAR button onthe front climate control system toturn the rear climate control systemon or off. An indicator comes onwhen the rear system is on.



The rear climate control system canalso be turned off by pressing andholding the C button. To turn thesystem on from the rear seats,press any rear climate controlbutton, except the C button.

Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control airflow settings.It comes on when REAR is pressedthe first time.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings of therear controls.

To turn the system on from therear, press any rear climate controlbutton, except the C button.

Automatic Operation, IfEquipped

AUTO: Press the air deliverymode button until this setting isselected to control the insidetemperature, air delivery, and fanspeed. AUTO appears in the displaywhen automatic operation is active.

+/− (Increase/DecreaseTemperature): Press the +or − buttons to increase ordecrease the cabin temperature.The rear control temperaturedisplay will show the temperaturesetting increasing or decreasing.

The display only indicates climatecontrol functions when the system isin rear independent mode.

Manual Operation

D C (Fan Control): Press thesebuttons on the rear seat audiocontrol panel to increase ordecrease the airflow. Pressingthe fan up button when the systemis off will turn the system on. The airdelivery mode will remain underautomatic control.

+/− (Temperature Control):Press these buttons to adjustthe temperature of the air flowinginto the passenger area. Pressthe + button for warmer air andpress the − button for cooler air.

N (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press the mode button to changethe direction of the airflow in thevehicle. Repeatedly press thebutton until the desired modeappears on the display. Multiplepresses will cycle through thedelivery selections.



Air VentsUse the air outlets located in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel to direct theairflow.

Operation Tips. Keep the hood and front air

inlets free of ice, snow, or anyother obstruction (such asleaves). The heater anddefroster will work far better,reducing the chance of foggingthe inside of the windows.

. When you enter a vehicle in coldweather, press the fan up buttonto the maximum fan level beforedriving. This helps clear theintake ducts of snow andmoisture, and reduces thechance of fogging the inside ofthe window.

. Keep the air path under the frontseats clear of objects. This helpsair to circulate throughout thevehicle.

. Adding outside equipment to thefront of the vehicle, such ashood-air deflectors, may affectthe performance of the heatingand air conditioning system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.



2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDefensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-18Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-19Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-22Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-28Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-35

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-37Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive (Two SpeedAutomaticTransfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Four-Wheel Drive (SingleSpeed AutomaticTransfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Ride Control SystemsStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-52Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Continuous DampingControl (CDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Automatic Level Control . . . . . 9-55

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-58Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63


9-2 Driving and Operating

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-68Gasoline Specifications (U.S.and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-69

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-69Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-70Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94

Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 9-94

Driving Information

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” Thefirst step in driving defensivelyis to wear the safety belt. SeeSafety Belts on page 3‑21.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.



Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving.In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associatedwith the use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person's systemcan make crash injuries worse,especially injuries to the brain,spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who hasbeen drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, thatperson's chance of being killed orpermanently disabled is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of thevehicle. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑52.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.



BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑23.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Decidingto push the brake pedal isperception time. Actually doingit is reaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. Butthat is only an average. It might beless with one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration.But even in three‐fourths ofa second, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft). That could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between thevehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the conditionof the road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavybraking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a mistake. The brakes might nothave time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realisticfollowing distances eliminatesa lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking andlonger brake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.



Steering

Power Steering


If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve,and then accelerate gently into thestraightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween parked cars and stops rightin front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking— if you canstop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because thereis no room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform very wellin emergencies like these. First,apply the brakes. See Braking onpage 9‑4. It is better to removeas much speed as possible from

a collision. Then steer aroundthe problem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.



The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder isonly slightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy. Easeoff the accelerator and then, if there

is nothing in the way, steer so thatthe vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. Turn the steeringwheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 in), aboutone-eighth turn, until the right fronttire contacts the pavement edge.Then turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.



Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try to avoidsudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingVehicles with four-wheel drivecan be used for off-road driving.Vehicles without four-wheel driveand vehicles with 20‐inch tire/wheelassemblies should not be drivenoff-road except on a level, solidsurface.

The airbag system is designed towork properly under a wide range ofconditions, including off‐road usage.Always wear your safety belt andobserve safe driving speeds,especially on rough terrain.

Drinking and driving can be verydangerous on any road and this iscertainly true for off-road driving.At the very time you need specialalertness and driving skills, yourreflexes, perceptions, and judgmentcan be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have aserious — or even fatal — accidentif you drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking.

Off-roading can be great fun but hassome definite hazards. The greatestof these is the terrain itself. Whenoff-road driving, traffic lanes are notmarked, curves are not banked, andthere are no road signs. Surfacescan be slippery, rough, uphill,or downhill.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers. Failure to operate thevehicle correctly off‐road couldresult in loss of vehicle control orvehicle rollover.

Off-roading involves some newskills. That is why it is veryimportant that you read thesedriving tips and suggestions tohelp make off-road driving saferand more enjoyable.



Before You Go Off-Roading. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work done.. Make sure there is enough fuel,

that fluid levels are where theyshould be, and that the sparetire, if the vehicle has one, isfully inflated.

. Be sure to read all theinformation aboutfour-wheel-drive vehiclesin this manual.

. Make sure all underbodyshields, if the vehicle has them,are properly attached.

. Know the local laws that applyto off-roading where you willbe driving or check with lawenforcement people in the area.

. Be sure to get the necessarypermission if you will be onprivate land.

If you think you will need somemore ground clearance at the frontof your vehicle, you can remove thefront fascia lower air dam. The airdam is held in place by two boltsand 10 snaps accessible fromunderneath the front fascia.

To remove the air dam:

1. Remove the two outboard airdam bolts.

2. With a flat‐blade tool, disengagethe snaps.

3. After the bolts are removed andthe snaps are disengaged, pushforward on the air dam until itis free.

Notice: Operating your vehiclefor extended periods withoutthe front fascia lower air daminstalled can cause improper airflow to the engine. Always besure to replace the front fasciaair dam when you are finishedoff-road driving.

After off-roading, be sure to reinstallthe air dam:

1. Line up the snaps and push theair dam rearward to engage thesnaps.

2. Install the two outboard bolts.

Loading Your Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ WARNING

. Cargo on the load floor piledhigher than the seatbackscan be thrown forward duringa sudden stop. You or yourpassengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top ofthe seatbacks.

. Unsecured cargo on theload floor can be tossedabout when driving overrough terrain. You or yourpassengers can be struckby flying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof. Keep cargo in thecargo area as far forward andlow as possible.

There are some important things toremember about how to load yourvehicle.. The heaviest things should be

on the floor, forward of the rearaxle. Put heavier items as farforward as you can.

. Be sure the load is properlysecured, so things are nottossed around.

You will find other importantinformation under Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑23 and Tires onpage 10‑48.

Environmental Concerns

Off-road driving can providewholesome and satisfyingrecreation. However, it also raisesenvironmental concerns. Werecognize these concerns and urgeevery off-roader to follow thesebasic rules for protecting theenvironment:. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenspecially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving andobey all posted regulations.

. Avoid any driving practicethat could damage shrubs,flowers, trees, or grasses ordisturb wildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking downtrees, or unnecessary drivingthrough streams or over softground.

. Always carry a litter bag andmake sure all refuse is removedfrom any campsite beforeleaving.

. Take extreme care with openfires (where permitted), campstoves, and lanterns.

. Never park your vehicle overdry grass or other combustiblematerials that could catch firefrom the heat of the vehicle'sexhaust system.

Traveling to Remote Areas

It makes sense to plan your trip,especially when going to a remotearea. Know the terrain and planyour route. Get accurate maps oftrails and terrain. Check to see ifthere are any blocked or closedroads.

It is also a good idea to travel withat least one other vehicle in casesomething happens to one of them.



For vehicles with a winch, be sureto read the winch instructions. In aremote area, a winch can be handyif you get stuck but you will want toknow how to use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-RoadDriving

It is a good idea to practice in anarea that is safe and close to homebefore you go into the wilderness.Off-roading requires some new anddifferent skills.

Tune your senses to different kindsof signals. Your eyes need toconstantly sweep the terrain forunexpected obstacles. Your earsneed to listen for unusual tire orengine sounds. Use your arms,hands, feet, and body to respondto vibrations and vehicle bounce.

Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicleis to control the speed. At higherspeeds:. You approach things faster and

have less time to react.. There is less time to scan the

terrain for obstacles.. The vehicle has more bounce

when driving over obstacles.. More braking distance is

needed, especially on anunpaved surface.

{ WARNING

When you are driving off-road,bouncing and quick changes indirection can easily throw youout of position. This could causeyou to lose control and crash.So, whether you are driving onor off the road, you and yourpassengers should wear safetybelts.

Scanning the Terrain

Off-road driving can take you overmany different kinds of terrain. Befamiliar with the terrain and its manydifferent features.

Surface Conditions: Off-roadingsurfaces can be hard-packed dirt,gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,snow, or ice. Each of these surfacesaffects the vehicle's steering,acceleration, and braking in differentways. Depending on the surface,slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,delayed acceleration, poor traction,and longer braking distances canoccur.

Surface Obstacles: Unseen orhidden obstacles can be hazardous.A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump canstartle you if you are not preparedfor them. Often these obstacles arehidden by grass, bushes, snow,or even the rise and fall of theterrain itself.



Some things to consider:. Is the path ahead clear?. Will the surface texture change

abruptly up ahead?. Does the travel take you uphill or

downhill?. Will you have to stop suddenly

or change direction quickly?

When driving over obstacles orrough terrain, keep a firm grip onthe steering wheel. Ruts, troughs,or other surface features can jerkthe wheel out of your hands.

When driving over bumps, rocks,or other obstacles, the wheels canleave the ground. If this happens,even with one or two wheels, youcannot control the vehicle as well orat all.

Because you will be on an unpavedsurface, it is especially important toavoid sudden acceleration, suddenturns, or sudden braking.

Off-roading requires a different kindof alertness from driving on pavedroads and highways. There are noroad signs, posted speed limits,or signal lights. Use good judgmentabout what is safe and what is not.

Driving on Hills

Off-road driving often takes you up,down, or across a hill. Driving safelyon hills requires good judgmentand an understanding of what thevehicle can and cannot do. Thereare some hills that simply cannot bedriven, no matter how well built thevehicle.

{ WARNING

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. If you drive upthem, you will stall. If you drivedown them, you cannot controlyour speed. If you drive acrossthem, you will roll over. You couldbe seriously injured or killed.If you have any doubt about thesteepness, do not drive the hill.



Approaching a Hill

When you approach a hill, decide ifit is too steep to climb, descend,or cross. Steepness can be hardto judge. On a very small hill, forexample, there may be a smooth,constant incline with only a smallchange in elevation where you caneasily see all the way to the top.On a large hill, the incline may getsteeper as you near the top, but youmight not see this because the crestof the hill is hidden by bushes,grass, or shrubs.

Consider this as you approach a hill:. Is there a constant incline,

or does the hill get sharplysteeper in places?

. Is there good traction on thehillside, or will the surface causetire slipping?

. Is there a straight path upor down the hill so you willnot have to make turningmaneuvers?

. Are there obstructions on the hillthat can block your path, suchas boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?

. What is beyond the hill? Isthere a cliff, an embankment, adrop-off, a fence? Get out andwalk the hill if you do not know.It is the smart way to find out.

. Is the hill simply too rough?Steep hills often have ruts,gullies, troughs, and exposedrocks because they are moresusceptible to the effects oferosion.

Driving Uphill

Once you decide it is safe to driveup the hill:. Use a low gear and get a firm

grip on the steering wheel.. Get a smooth start up the hill

and try to maintain speed. Notusing more power than neededcan avoid spinning the wheels orsliding.

{ WARNING

Turning or driving across steephills can be dangerous. You couldlose traction, slide sideways, andpossibly roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. Whendriving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

. Try to drive straight up the hill ifat all possible. If the path twistsand turns, you might want to findanother route.

. Ease up on the speed as youapproach the top of the hill.

. Attach a flag to the vehicle to bemore visible to approachingtraffic on trails or hills.

. Sound the horn as you approachthe top of the hill to let opposingtraffic know you are there.



. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible to oncoming traffic.

{ WARNING

Driving to the top (crest) of ahill at full speed can cause anaccident. There could be adrop-off, embankment, cliff,or even another vehicle. Youcould be seriously injured orkilled. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

If the vehicle stalls, or is about tostall, and you cannot make it upthe hill:. Push the brake pedal to stop the

vehicle and keep it from rollingbackwards and apply theparking brake.

. If the engine is still running, shiftthe transmission to R (Reverse),release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill inR (Reverse).

. If the engine has stoppedrunning, you need to restart it.With the brake pedal pressedand the parking brake stillapplied, shift the transmission toP (Park) and restart the engine.Then, shift to R (Reverse),release the parking brake,and slowly back down thehill as straight as possible inR (Reverse).

. While backing down the hill, putyour left hand on the steeringwheel at the 12 o'clock positionso you can tell if the wheels arestraight and can maneuver asyou back down. It is best to backdown the hill with the wheelsstraight rather than in the left orright direction. Turning the wheeltoo far to the left or right willincrease the possibility of arollover.

Things not to do if the vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, when going upa hill:. Never attempt to prevent a stall

by shifting into N (Neutral) torev-up the engine and regainforward momentum. This willnot work. The vehicle can rollbackward very quickly and couldgo out of control.

. Never try to turn around ifabout to stall when going up ahill. If the hill is steep enoughto stall the vehicle, it is steepenough to cause it to roll over.If you cannot make it up the hill,back straight down the hill.

If, after stalling, you try to backdown the hill and decide you justcannot do it, set the parking brake,put your transmission in P (Park),and turn off the engine. Leave thevehicle and go get some help.



Exit on the uphill side and stay clearof the path the vehicle would take ifit rolled downhill. If the vehicle hasa transfer case with a N (Neutral)position, do not shift the transfercase to Neutral when you leave thevehicle. Leave it in some gear.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle has the two‐speedautomatic transfer case, shiftingthe transfer case to Neutral cancause your vehicle to roll even ifthe transmission is in P (Park).This is because the Neutralposition on the transfer caseoverrides the transmission. Youor someone else could be injured.If you are going to leave yourvehicle, set the parking brakeand shift the transmission toP (Park). But, if the vehicle hasa two‐speed automatic transfercase, do not shift the transfercase to Neutral.

Driving Downhill

When off-roading takes youdownhill, consider:. How steep is the downhill? Will

I be able to maintain vehiclecontrol?

. What is the surface like?Smooth? Rough? Slippery?Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

. Are there hidden surfaceobstacles? Ruts? Logs?Boulders?

. What is at the bottom of the hill?Is there a hidden creek bank oreven a river bottom with largerocks?

If you decide you can go down ahill safely, try to keep the vehicleheaded straight down. Use a lowgear so engine drag can help thebrakes so they do not have to do allthe work. Descend slowly, keepingthe vehicle under control at alltimes.

{ WARNING

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply thebrakes lightly when descending ahill and use a low gear to keepvehicle speed under control.

Things not to do when driving downa hill:. When driving downhill, avoid

turns that take you across theincline of the hill. A hill that is nottoo steep to drive down might betoo steep to drive across. Thevehicle could roll over.

. Never go downhill with thetransmission in N (Neutral),called free-wheeling. The brakeswill have to do all the work andcould overheat and fade.



Vehicles are much more likely tostall when going uphill, but if ithappens when going downhill:

1. Stop the vehicle by applying theregular brakes and apply theparking brake.

2. Shift to P (Park) and, while stillbraking, restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, releasethe parking brake, and drivestraight down.

4. If the engine will not start, getout and get help.

Driving Across an Incline

An off-road trail will probably goacross the incline of a hill. To decidewhether to try to drive across theincline, consider the following:

{ WARNING

Driving across an incline that istoo steep will make your vehicleroll over. You could be seriously

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

injured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness of theincline, do not drive across it.Find another route instead.

. A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steepto drive across. When goingstraight up or down a hill, thelength of the wheel base — thedistance from the front wheels tothe rear wheels — reduces thelikelihood the vehicle will tumbleend over end. But when drivingacross an incline, the narrowertrack width — the distancebetween the left and rightwheels — might not prevent thevehicle from tilting and rollingover. Driving across an inclineputs more weight on the downhillwheels which could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline evenworse. If you drive across a rockwith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

For these reasons, carefullyconsider whether to try to driveacross an incline. Just because thetrail goes across the incline doesnot mean you have to drive it. Thelast vehicle to try it might haverolled over.



If you feel the vehicle starting toslide sideways, turn downhill.This should help straighten outthe vehicle and prevent the sideslipping. The best way to preventthis is to “walk the course” first, soyou know what the surface is likebefore driving it.

Stalling on an Incline

{ WARNING

Getting out on the downhill (low)side of a vehicle stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If thevehicle rolls over, you could becrushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

If the vehicle stalls when crossingan incline, be sure you, and anypassengers, get out on the uphillside, even if the door there isharder to open. If you get out on

the downhill side and the vehiclestarts to roll over, you will be right inits path.

If you have to walk down the slope,stay out of the path the vehicle willtake if it does roll over.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

When you drive in mud, snow,or sand, the wheels do not getgood traction. Acceleration is not asquick, turning is more difficult, andbraking distances are longer.

It is best to use a low gear when inmud — the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. In really deep mud,keep the vehicle moving so it doesnot get stuck.

When driving on sand, wheeltraction changes. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sanddunes, the tires will tend to sinkinto the sand. This affects steering,accelerating, and braking. Drive at areduced speed and avoid sharpturns or abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offerthe worst tire traction. On thesesurfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example, thetraction is so poor that you will havedifficulty accelerating. And, if thevehicle does get moving, poorsteering and difficult braking cancause it to slide out of control.

{ WARNING

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous.Underwater springs, currentsunder the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehiclecould fall through the ice andyou and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.



Driving in Water

{ WARNING

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, andyou could lose traction and rollthe vehicle over. Do not drivethrough rushing water.

Heavy rain can mean flash flooding,and flood waters demand extremecaution.

Find out how deep the water isbefore driving through it. Do not tryit if it is deep enough to cover thewheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe — you probably will not getthrough. Deep water can damagethe axle and other vehicle parts.

If the water is not too deep, driveslowly through it. At faster speeds,water splashes on the ignitionsystem and the vehicle can stall.Stalling can also occur if you get thetailpipe under water. If the tailpipe isunder water, you will never be ableto start the engine. When goingthrough water, remember that whenthe brakes get wet, it might takelonger to stop. See Driving on WetRoads on page 9‑18.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody,chassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

The vehicle requires more frequentservice due to off-road use. Referto the Maintenance Schedule foradditional information.



Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well ina quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the roadis wet enough and you are goingfast enough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑48.

. Turn off cruise control.



Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, finda safe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

You could crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Top of hills: Bealert — something couldbe in your lane (stalled car,accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.



Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑50 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply thebrakes sooner than when on drypavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remainicy when the surrounding roadsare clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑6.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑36.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.



If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle'straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑70.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. For four-wheel-drivevehicles, shift into Four‐Wheel Highor, if the vehicle has a two‐speedautomatic transfer case, Four‐WheelLow. For vehicles with StabiliTrak®,turn the traction control part of thesystem off. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedalwhile shifting, and press lightly onthe accelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forward

and reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. Recoveryhooks can be used, if the vehiclehas them. If the vehicle does needto be towed out, see Towing theVehicle on page 10‑93.

Recovery Hooks

{ WARNING

These hooks, when used, areunder a lot of force. Always pullthe vehicle straight out. Neverpull on the hooks at a sidewaysangle. The hooks could breakoff and you or others could beinjured from the chain or cablesnapping back.



Notice: Never use recoveryhooks to tow the vehicle. Yourvehicle could be damaged andit would not be covered bywarranty.

For vehicles with recovery hooks atthe front of the vehicle, you can usethem if you are stuck off-road andneed to be pulled to some placewhere you can continue driving.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver dooropen, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost (striker). The tire andloading information label showsthe number of occupant seating

positions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10‑48 and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axles. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbsand there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,



the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacityof your vehicle. SeeTrailerTowing on page 9‑79 forimportant information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

C. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs)

Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg(750 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)



Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to your vehicle's tire andloading information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the rearedge of the driver door. Thelabel shows the size of yourvehicle's original tires and theinflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof your vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weighstation and weigh your vehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out yourload equally on both sides of thecenterline.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle, or the GAWR foreither the front or rear axle.

The Certification/Tire label alsocontains information about yourFront Axle Reserve Capacity.

And, if you do have a heavyload, you should spread it out.



{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice: Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

The label will help you decidehow much cargo and installedequipment your truck can carry.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not changeyour weight ratings. Ask yourdealer to help you load yourvehicle the right way.

If you put things inside yourvehicle— like suitcases,tools, packages, or anythingelse— they go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving”under Off-Road Driving onpage 9‑7.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500miles).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast orslow, for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9‑79 for the trailertowing capabilities ofthe vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalOn vehicles with this feature, youcan change the position of thethrottle and brake pedals.

No adjustment to the pedals canbe made when the vehicle is inR (Reverse) or while using cruisecontrol.

The control used to adjust thepedals is located on the instrumentpanel below the climate controlsystem.



Press the bottom of the control tomove the pedals closer. Press thetop of the control to move thepedals away.

Before you start driving, fullypress the brake pedal to confirmthe adjustment is right for you.While driving, make only smalladjustments.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction which lets pedal settingsbe saved and recalled. See PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑4 formore information.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), theignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and the regularbrake pedal must be applied.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑33.

This position locks the ignition.It also locks the transmission onautomatic transmission vehicles.The key can be removed inLOCK/OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

In an emergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to neutral,firmly apply the brakes and steerthe vehicle to a safe location.



3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑51.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, then the vehicle needsservice.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition lets things like the radioand the windshield wipers operatewhile the engine is off. Use thisposition if the vehicle must bepushed or towed.

C (ON/RUN): This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel cluster warningand indicator lights. The switchstays in this position when theengine is running. The transmissionis also unlocked in this position onautomatic transmission vehicles.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

D (START): This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound whenthe driver door is opened and theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF, and the key is in theignition.

Starting the EngineIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.



Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key. The idle speed will godown as the engine warms.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue crankingfor a few seconds or until the

vehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART, cranking will be stoppedafter 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage. Toprevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switchto the ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF position.

When the Low Fuel warninglamp is on and the FUEL LEVELLOW message is displayed inthe Driver Information Center(DIC), the Computer‐ControlledCranking System is disabledto prevent possible vehiclecomponent damage. When thishappens, hold the ignition switchin the START position tocontinue engine cranking.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damage

the cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter 5‐10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all theway to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key inSTART for up to a maximumof 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat thesesteps. This clears the extragasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.



Operate the engine andtransmission gently until theoil warms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: The engine is designedto work with the electronics inthe vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicleswith an engine heater should beplugged in at least four hours beforestarting. An internal thermostat inthe plug-end of the cord may existwhich will prevent engine coolantheater operation at temperaturesabove −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrapthe electrical cord. The cordis secured to the EngineCompartment Fuse Blockwith a clip. Carefully removethe wire tie which secures theelectrical cord. Do not cut theelectrical cord.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keepit away from moving engineparts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.



The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)The following vehicle accessoriescan be used for up to 10 minutesafter the engine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. OnStar System (if equipped). Sunroof (if equipped)

These features work when thekey is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the windows and sunroof continueto work up to 10 minutes until anydoor is opened. The radio continuesto work for up to 10 minutes or untilthe driver door is opened.

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehiclewill not move, even when you areon fairly level ground, use thesteps that follow. If you have afour-wheel drive transfer casewith a N (Neutral) position, andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). So, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear— not inN (Neutral). If you are pulling a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

trailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑75.Always set the parking brake.

1. Hold the brake pedal down, thenset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9‑51for more information.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear— not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

5. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).



Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). So be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — not inN (Neutral).

And, if you leave the vehicle withthe engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. Youor others could be injured. Do notleave the vehicle with the enginerunning unless you have to.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure yourvehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shiftlever into P (Park), hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pulling it towardyou. If you can, it means that theshift lever was not fully locked intoP (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill andyou do not shift your transmissioninto P (Park) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find itdifficult to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park). This is called torque lock.To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift intoP (Park) properly before you leavethe driver seat. To find out how, seeShifting Into Park on page 9‑33.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, then you will beable to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park).

Shifting Out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped withan electronic shift lock releasesystem. The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regularbrake pedal is applied.



The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑88 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park) use thefollowing:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift lever allthe way into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced soon.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active Fuel Management®

Vehicles with V8 engines may haveActive Fuel Management™. Thissystem allows the engine to operateon either all or half of its cylinders,depending on the driving conditions.

When less power is required, suchas cruising at a constant vehiclespeed, the system will operate inthe half cylinder mode, allowingthe vehicle to achieve better fueleconomy. When greater powerdemands are required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

If the vehicle has an Active FuelManagement™ indicator, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑28 for more information onusing this display.



Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑36.



{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

{ WARNING

If the vehicle has a four-wheeldrive transfer case with aN (Neutral) position, and thetransfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle may roll, even if theautomatic transmission shiftlever is in P (Park). So, be surethe transfer case is in a drivegear — not in N (Neutral). Alwaysset the parking brake.

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑33.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑75.

AutomaticTransmissionIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

If the vehicle is has an automatictransmission, it has an electronicshift position indicator within theinstrument panel cluster. Thisdisplay comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the ON/RUNposition.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

Heavy Duty 6-Speed AutomaticTransmission Shown (Light Duty

Similar)

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode on page 9‑41.



P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily. When parked on a hill,especially when the vehicle has aheavy load, you might notice anincrease in the effort to shift out ofP (Park). See “Torque Lock” underShifting Into Park on page 9‑33 formore information.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unlessyou have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑33. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑75.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle has a four-wheeldrive transfer case with aN (Neutral) position, and thetransfer case is in N (Neutral), thevehicle will be free to roll— evenif the shift lever is in P (Park).Be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear, Two-Wheel Drive Highor Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low— not inN (Neutral). See Shifting Into Parkon page 9‑33. Always set theparking brake.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑22.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.



{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.

D (Drive) can be used when towinga trailer, carrying a heavy load,driving on steep hills, or for off-roaddriving. You might want to shiftthe transmission to a lower gearselection if the transmission shiftstoo often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9‑6.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designedto determine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear. Insome cases, this could appearto be a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The vehicle's transmissionuses adaptive shift controls.Adaptive shift controls continuallycompares key shift parameters topre-programmed ideal shifts storedin the transmissions computer.



The transmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such aswith a heavy load or when thetemperature changes. During thisadaptive shift control process,shifting might feel different as thetransmission determines the bestsettings.

When temperatures are very cold,shifting could be delayed providingmore stable shifts until the enginewarms up. Shifts could be morenoticeable with a cold transmission.This difference in shifting is normal.

M (Manual Mode): This positionlets drivers select the range of gearsappropriate for current drivingconditions. If the vehicle has thisfeature, see “Range SelectionMode” under Manual Mode onpage 9‑41.

3 (Third): This position is also usedfor normal driving. It reduces vehiclespeed more than D (Drive) withoutusing the brakes. You might choose3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) whendriving on hilly, winding roads, whentowing a trailer, so there is lessshifting between gears and whengoing down a steep hill.

2 (Second): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than3 (Third) without using the brakes.You can use 2 (Second) on hills.It can help control vehicle speed asyou go down steep mountain roads,but then you would also want to usethe brakes off and on.

If you manually select 2 (Second)in an automatic transmission,the transmission will start insecond gear. You can use thisfeature for reducing the speed of therear wheels when you are trying tostart the vehicle from a stop onslippery road surfaces.

1 (First): This position reducesvehicle speed without using thebrakes. You can use it for major/severe downgrades and off-roaddriving where the vehicle wouldotherwise accelerate due tosteepness of grade. When you shiftto 1 (First) it provides the lowestgear appropriate to the vehicle'scurrent road speed and continuesto downshift as the vehicle slows,eventually downshifting to1 (First) gear.

Notice: Spinning the tiresor holding the vehicle in oneplace on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.



Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode(Hydra-Matic® 6-SpeedTransmission)

Base Trim Shown (Uplevel Similar)

The vehicle may have a RangeSelection Mode. The RangeSelection Mode helps control thevehicle's transmission and vehiclespeed while driving down hill ortowing a trailer by letting you selecta desired range of gears.

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus buttons,located on the steering columnshift lever, to select the desiredrange of gears for the currentdriving conditions.

When M (Manual Mode) is selecteda number displays next to the M,indicating the current gear.

This number is the highest gear thatcan be used. However, the vehiclecan automatically shift to lowergears as it adjusts to drivingconditions. This means that allgears below that number areavailable. When 5 (Fifth) is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle,but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used untilthe plus/minus button located onthe steering column lever is used tochange to the gear.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑42.

While using Range Selection Mode,Cruise Control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

Notice: Spinning the tiresor holding the vehicle in oneplace on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.

Low Traction Mode

If the vehicle has the Hydra-Matic®

6-Speed Automatic Transmission,it has a Low Traction Mode thatassists in vehicle acceleration whenroad conditions are slippery, suchas with ice or snow. While thevehicle is at a stop, select thesecond gear range using RangeSelection Mode. This will limittorque to the wheels after it detectswheel slip, preventing the tires fromspinning.



Tow/Haul Mode

The vehicle has a Tow/Haul Mode.The selector button is located on theend of the column shift lever. Youcan use this feature to assist whentowing or hauling a heavy load or ifthere is a need to charge a batteryinstalled in a trailer. See TowingEquipment on page 9‑84 for moreinformation.

When Tow/Haul Mode is selectedthe tow/haul indicator light willcome on.

The Tow/Haul Mode works with theAutoride® feature, if the vehiclehas this, to enhance the ride whentrailering or with a loaded vehicle.See Continuous Damping Control(CDC) on page 9‑55.

Grade Braking (Hydra-Matic®

6-Speed AutomaticTransmission)

The Grade Braking shift modes canbe activated by pressing the buttonon the end of the shift control lever.While in Range Selection Mode,Grade Braking is deactivatedallowing the driver to select adesired range of gears.

Grade Braking is only active whilethe Tow/Haul Mode is selected andyou are not in the Range SelectionMode. See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode onpage 9‑41 for more information onthe Range Selection Mode. GradeBraking assists in maintainingdesired vehicle speeds when driving

on downhill grades by automaticallyimplementing a shift schedule thatutilizes the engine and transmissionto slow the vehicle. This reduceswear on the braking system andincreases control of the vehicle.Grade Braking monitors vehiclespeed, acceleration, engine torqueand brake pedal usage. Using thisinformation, it detects when thetruck is on a downhill grade and thedriver desires to slow the vehicle bypressing the brake.

Also see Towing Equipment onpage 9‑84 for more information.

Cruise Grade Braking(Hydra-Matic® 6-SpeedAutomatic Transmission)

Cruise Grade Braking assistswhen driving on a downhill grade.It maintains vehicle speed byautomatically implementing a shiftschedule that uses the engine andthe transmission to slow the vehicle.



Cruise Grade Braking operateswhile Cruise Control is engagedin Tow/Haul Mode to assist inmaintaining vehicle speed underloaded vehicle conditions. It utilizesvehicle acceleration and deviationfrom desired speed to determinethe correct gear for the operatingcondition. If vehicle speed is abovethe desired speed the transmissionwill downshift to slow the vehicle.If vehicle speed is near or belowdesired speed the trans will upshift,allowing vehicle speed to increase.

While in the Range SelectionMode, Cruise Grade Braking is notavailable.

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode on page 9‑41.

Drive Systems

Four-Wheel Drive (TwoSpeed AutomaticTransfer Case)If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,you can send the engine's drivingpower to all four wheels for extratraction. Read the following beforeusing four-wheel drive.

Notice: Driving on clean, drypavement in Four-Wheel DriveHigh or Four-Wheel Drive Low foran extended period of time maycause premature wear on thevehicle's powertrain. Do notdrive on clean, dry pavementin Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low forextended periods of time.

While driving on clean dry pavementand during tight turns, you mayexperience a vibration in thesteering system.

The vehicle has StabiliTrak®.Shifting into Four-Wheel DriveLow will turn Traction Control andStabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑52.

Front Axle

The front axle engages anddisengages automatically when youshift the transfer case. Some delayfor the axle to engage or disengageis normal.




The transfer case knob is located tothe left of the instrument panelcluster.

Use this dial to shift into and out offour-wheel drive.

You can choose among five drivingsettings:

Indicator lights in the switches showyou which setting you are in. Theindicator lights will come on brieflywhen you turn on the ignition andthe last chosen setting will stay on.

If the lights do not come on, youshould take the vehicle to yourdealer for service. An indicator lightwill flash while shifting. It will stay onwhen the shift is completed. If forsome reason the transfer casecannot make a requested shift, it willreturn to the last chosen setting.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations.The front axle is not engaged intwo-wheel drive. This setting alsoprovides the best fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive): This setting is ideal foruse when road surface tractionconditions are variable. Whendriving the vehicle in AUTO, thefront axle is engaged, and thevehicle's power is sent to the frontand rear wheels automaticallybased on driving conditions. Drivingin this mode results in slightly lowerfuel economy than Two-WheelDrive High.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Usethe Four-Wheel Drive High positionwhen you need extra traction, suchas on snowy or icy roads or in mostoff-road situations. This setting alsoengages your front axle to helpdrive the vehicle. This is the bestsetting to use when plowing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): Thissetting also engages the front axleand delivers extra torque. You maynever need this setting. It sendsmaximum power to all four wheels.You might choose Four-Wheel DriveLow if you are driving off-road indeep sand, deep mud, deep snow,and while climbing or descendingsteep hills.

The vehicle has StabiliTrak. Shiftinginto Four-Wheel Drive Low will turnTraction Control and StabiliTrakoff. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑52.



{ WARNING

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure to set the parking brakebefore placing the transfer case inN (Neutral). See Parking Brake onpage 9‑51.

N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle'stransfer case to N (Neutral) onlywhen towing the vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑93 or Towing the Vehicleon page 10‑93 for more information.

If the SERVICE 4WHEEL DRIVEmessage stays on, you shouldtake the vehicle to your dealerfor service. See “SERVICE4WHEEL DRIVE” messageunder Transmission Messages onpage 5‑46.

Shifting Into Four-Wheel DriveHigh or AUTO (AutomaticFour-Wheel Drive)

Turn the knob to the Four-WheelDrive High or AUTO position. Thiscan be done at any speed, exceptwhen shifting from Four-WheelDrive Low. The indicator light willflash while shifting. It will remain onwhen the shift is completed.

Shifting Into Two-WheelDrive High

Turn the knob to the Two-WheelDrive High position. This can bedone at any speed, except whenshifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low.

See “Shifting Out of Four-WheelDrive Low” in this section for moreinformation.

Shifting Into Four-WheelDrive Low

When Four-Wheel Drive Low isengaged, vehicle speed shouldbe kept below 72 km/h (45 mph).Extended high-speed operationin 4L may damage or shorten the lifeof the drivetrain.



To shift to the Four-Wheel DriveLow position, the ignition must be inON/RUN and the vehicle must bestopped or moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmission inN (Neutral). The preferred methodfor shifting into Four-Wheel DriveLow is to have the vehicle moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turnthe knob to the Four-Wheel DriveLow position. You must wait for theFour-Wheel Drive Low indicatorlight to stop flashing and remain onbefore shifting the transmissioninto gear.

Notice: Shifting the transmissioninto gear before the Four-WheelDrive Low indicator light hasstopped flashing could damagethe transfer case. To help avoiddamaging the vehicle, always waitfor the Four-Wheel Drive Lowindicator light to stop flashingbefore shifting the transmissioninto gear.

The vehicle may have significantengagement noise and bump whenshifting between Four-Wheel DriveLow and Four-Wheel Drive Highranges or from N (Neutral) while theengine is running.

If the knob is turned to theFour-Wheel Drive Low positionwhen the vehicle is in gear and/ormoving more than 1.6 to 3.2 km/h(1 to 2 mph), the Four-Wheel DriveLow indicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete theshift. After 30 seconds the transfercase will shift to Four-Wheel DriveHigh mode. With the vehicle movingless than 5 km/h (3 mph) and thetransmission in N (Neutral), attemptthe shift again.

Shifting Out of Four-WheelDrive Low

To shift from Four-Wheel DriveLow to Four-Wheel Drive High,AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High,the vehicle must be stopped ormoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)with the transmission in N (Neutral)

and the ignition in ON/RUN. Thepreferred method for shifting out ofFour-Wheel Drive Low is to haveyour vehicle moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h(1 to 2 mph). Turn the knob to theFour-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,or Two-Wheel Drive High position.You must wait for the Four-WheelDrive High, AUTO, or Two-WheelDrive High indicator light to stopflashing and remain on beforeshifting the transmission into gear.


The vehicle may have significantengagement noise and bump whenshifting between Four-Wheel DriveLow and Four-Wheel Drive Highranges or from N (Neutral) while theengine is running.



If the knob is turned to theFour-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,or Two-Wheel Drive High switchposition when the vehicle is ingear and/or moving more than1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph), theFour-Wheel Drive High, AUTO orTwo-Wheel Drive High indicator lightwill flash for 30 seconds but will notcomplete the shift. With the vehiclemoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)and the transmission is inN (Neutral), attempt the shift again.

Shifting into Neutral

To shift the transfer case toN (Neutral) do the following:

1. Make sure the vehicle is parkedso that it will not roll.

2. Set the parking brake and applythe regular brake pedal. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑51 formore information.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition to ON/RUN.

4. Put the transmission inN (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case toTwo-Wheel Drive High.

6. Turn the transfer case dialclockwise to N (Neutral) untilit stops and hold it there untilthe N (Neutral) light startsblinking. This will take at least10 seconds. Then slowly releasethe dial to the Four‐Wheel DriveLow position. The N (Neutral)light will come on when thetransfer case shift to N (Neutral)is complete.

7. If the engine is running, verifythat the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse)for one second, then shift thetransmission to D (Drive) forone second.

8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will turn theengine off.

9. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park).

10. Release the parking brake priorto moving the vehicle.

11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

Shifting Out of Neutral

To shift out of N Neutral do thefollowing:

1. Set the parking brake and applythe regular brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off, and shift thetransmission to N (Neutral).

3. Turn the transfer case dial tothe desired transfer case shiftposition (Two-Wheel DriveHigh, Four-Wheel Drive High,or AUTO).

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.



4. Release the parking brake priorto moving the vehicle.


5. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to the desiredposition.

Excessively shifting the transfercase into or out of the differentmodes may cause the transfer caseto enter the shift protection mode.This will protect the transfer casefrom possible damage and will onlyallow the transfer case to respondto one shift per 10 seconds. Thetransfer case may stay in this modefor up to three minutes.

Four-Wheel Drive(Single Speed AutomaticTransfer Case)If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,you can send the engine's drivingpower to all four wheels for extratraction. Read the following beforeusing four-wheel drive.

Notice: Driving on clean, drypavement in Four-Wheel DriveHigh for an extended period oftime may cause premature wearon the vehicle's powertrain. Donot drive on clean, dry pavementin Four-Wheel Drive High forextended periods of time.

While driving on clean dry pavementand during tight turns, you mayexperience a vibration in thesteering system.

Front Axle

The front axle engages anddisengages automatically when youshift the transfer case. Some delayfor the axle to engage or disengageis normal.


The transfer case knob is locatedto the left of the instrument panelcluster.

Use this dial to shift into and out offour-wheel drive.



The vehicle has Four-Wheel Drivewith StabiliTrak®. For information onStabiliTrak, see StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑52.

You can choose among threedriving settings:

Indicator lights in the switch showyou which setting you are in. Theindicator lights will come on brieflywhen you turn on the ignition andthe last chosen setting will stay on.If the lights do not come on, youshould take the vehicle to yourdealer for service. An indicator lightwill flash while shifting. It will stay onwhen the shift is completed. If forsome reason the transfer casecannot make a requested shift, it willreturn to the last chosen setting.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations.The front axle is not engaged intwo-wheel drive. This setting alsoprovides the best fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive): This setting is ideal foruse when road surface tractionconditions are variable. Whendriving the vehicle in AUTO, thefront axle is engaged, and thevehicle's power is sent to the frontand rear wheels automaticallybased on driving conditions. Drivingin this mode results in slightly lowerfuel economy than Two-WheelDrive High.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Usethe Four-Wheel Drive High positionwhen you need extra traction, suchas on snowy or icy roads or in mostoff-road situations. This setting alsoengages the front axle to help drivethe vehicle. This is the best settingto use when plowing snow.

Service Four‐Wheel Drive

If the SERVICE 4WHEEL DRIVEmessage stays on, you shouldtake the vehicle to your dealerfor service. See “SERVICE4WHEEL DRIVE” messageunder Transmission Messages onpage 5‑46.

Shifting Into Four-Wheel DriveHigh or AUTO (AutomaticFour-Wheel Drive)

Turn the knob to the Four-WheelDrive High or AUTO position.This can be done at any speed.The indicator light will flash whileshifting. It will remain on when theshift is completed.



Shifting Into Two-WheelDrive High

Turn the knob to the Two-WheelDrive High position. This can bedone at any speed. The indicatorlight will flash while shifting. Itwill remain on when the shift iscompleted.

Excessively shifting the transfercase into or out of the differentmodes may cause the transfer caseto enter the shift protection mode.This will protect the transfer casefrom possible damage and will onlyallow the transfer case to respondto one shift per 10 seconds. Thetransfer case may stay in this modefor up to three minutes.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the AntilockBrake System (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑24.

If driving safely on a wet road andit becomes necessary to slam onthe brakes and continue brakingto avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.



As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

Set the parking brake by holding theregular brake pedal down, thenpushing down the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑23.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the parking brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will flash and achime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer andare parking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑75.



Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist thedriver in stopping or decreasingvehicle speed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplementthe power brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this timeis normal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage whenthe brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Ride Control Systems

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer-controlled system thatassists the driver with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to assist thedriver with keeping the vehicle onthe intended path.

When the vehicle is started andbegins to move, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto insure there are no problems.The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle.

The system should initialize beforethe vehicle reaches 32 km/h(20 mph). In some cases, it maytake approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) ofdriving before the system initializes.

If cruise control is being usedwhen StabiliTrak activates, thecruise control automaticallydisengages. The cruise controlcan be re-engaged when roadconditions allow. See Cruise Controlon page 9‑56.

If the system fails to turn on oractivate, the StabiliTrak lightalong with one of the followingmessages will be displayed on theDriver Information Center (DIC):TRACTION CONTROL OFF,SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICESTABILITRAK. If these DICmessages appear, make surethe StabiliTrak system has not beenturned off using the StabiliTrakon/off button. Then turn the vehicleoff, wait 15 seconds, and then turn itback on again to reset the system.



If any of these messages stillappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the vehicle shouldbe taken in for service. For moreinformation on the DIC messages,see Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑28.

The StabiliTrak light will flash on theinstrument panel cluster when thesystem is both on and activated.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working; this is normal.

The traction control disable button islocated on the instrument panel.

The traction control part ofStabiliTrak can be turned offby pressing and releasing theStabiliTrak button if both systems(traction control and StabiliTrak)were previously on. To disable bothTCS and StabiliTrak, press andhold 5 until F illuminates and theappropriate DIC message displays.

Traction control and StabiliTrakcan be turned on by pressing andreleasing the StabiliTrak button ifthey are not automatically shut offfor any other reason.

When the traction control system(TCS) or StabiliTrak system isturned off, the StabiliTrak lightand the appropriate TCS off orStabiliTrak off message will bedisplayed on the DIC to warn thedriver. The vehicle will still havebrake-traction control when tractioncontrol is off, but will not be able touse the engine speed managementsystem. See “Traction ControlOperation” next for moreinformation.

When the traction control systemhas been turned off, system noisesmay still be heard as a result of thebrake-traction control coming on.



It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicleto attempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spin isrequired. See If the Vehicle is Stuckon page 9‑22.

When the transfer case is in 4LO,the stability system is automaticallydisabled, the StabiliTrak light comeson, and the STABILITRAK OFFmessage will appear on the DIC.Both traction control and StabiliTrakare automatically disabled in thiscondition.

Traction Control Operation

The traction control system ispart of the StabiliTrak system.Traction control limits wheel spinby reducing engine power to thewheels (engine speed management)

and by applying brakes to eachindividual wheel (brake-tractioncontrol) as necessary.

The traction control system isenabled automatically when thevehicle is started. It will activate andthe StabiliTrak light will flash if itsenses that any of the wheels arespinning or beginning to losetraction while driving. If tractioncontrol is turned off, only thebrake-traction control portion oftraction control will work. Theengine speed management willbe disabled. In this mode, enginepower is not reduced automaticallyand the driven wheels can spinmore freely. This can cause thebrake-traction control to activateconstantly.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axleis allowed to spin excessivelywhile the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brakewarning lights, and any relevantDIC messages are displayed, thetransfer case could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Reduce

engine power and do not spinthe wheel(s) excessively whilethese lights and messages aredisplayed.

The traction control system mayactivate on dry or rough roads orunder conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning orabrupt upshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this happens,a reduction in acceleration may benoticed, or a noise or vibration maybe heard. This is normal.

If cruise control is being used whenthe system activates, the StabiliTraklight will flash and cruise control willautomatically disengage. Cruisecontrol may be reengaged whenroad conditions allow. See CruiseControl on page 9‑56.

StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines thata problem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itselfafter restarting the vehicle, see yourdealer for service.



Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Continuous DampingControl (CDC)This vehicle may have a continuousdamping control system calledAutoride® or MagneRide™. Withthis feature, improved vehicle rideand handling is provided under avariety of passenger and loadingconditions.

Autoride and MagneRide are fullyautomatic and use a computercontroller to continuously monitorvehicle speed, wheel to bodyposition, lift/dive and steeringposition of the vehicle. Thecontroller then sends signalsto each shock absorber to

independently adjust the dampinglevel to provide the optimumvehicle ride.

Autoride and MagneRide alsointeract with the tow/haul modethat, when activated, will provideadditional control of the shockabsorbers. This additional controlresults in better ride and handlingcharacteristics when the vehicle isloaded or towing a trailer. See“Tow/Haul Mode” under TrailerTowing on page 9‑79 for moreinformation.

Automatic Level ControlThe automatic level control rearsuspension is available onlight‐duty vehicles and comes as apart of the Continuous DampingControl (CDC) suspension,if equipped.

This type of level control is fullyautomatic and will provide a betterleveled riding position as well asbetter handling under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions.An air compressor connected tothe rear shocks will raise or lowerthe rear of the vehicle to maintainproper vehicle height. The systemis activated when the ignition keyis turned to ON/RUN and willautomatically adjust vehicle heightthereafter. The system may exhaust(lower vehicle height) for up toten minutes after the ignition keyhas been turned off. You may hearthe air compressor operating whenthe height is being adjusted.

If a weight‐distributing hitch isbeing used, it is recommended toallow the shocks to inflate, therebyleveling the vehicle prior to adjustingthe hitch.



Cruise Control

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

With cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more canbe maintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol is turned off.

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and thesystem begins to limit wheel spin,cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑52. When road conditionsallow the cruise control to be safelyused again, it can be turnedback on.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on left side of the steeringwheel.

I (On/Off): Press to turn thesystem on or off. The indicator lightis on when cruise control is on andturns off when cruise control is off.

+RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to make the vehicleresume to a previously set speed,or press and hold to accelerate.

SET− (Set/Coast): Press to set thespeed and activate cruise control ormake the vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onafter the cruise control has been setto the desired speed.

1. Press theI button.

2. Get up to the desired speed.



3. Press the SET− button locatedon the steering wheel andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,press the +RES button on thesteering wheel. The vehicle returnsto the previous set speed and staysthere.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall amounts, press the +RESbutton. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the SET– button

on the steering wheel until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the SET– button on thesteering wheel briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control willwork on hills depends upon thevehicle speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When goingup steep hills, you might have tostep on the accelerator pedal tomaintain the vehicle speed. Whengoing downhill, you might have tobrake or shift to a lower gear tokeep the vehicle speed down. Whenthe brakes are applied the cruisecontrol is disengaged.



Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press the [ on the steeringwheel.

. To turn off the cruise control,pressI on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressingtheI button or if the ignition isturned off.

Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,it operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph), and assists thedriver with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse). Thesensors on the rear bumper areused to detect the distance to anobject up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind thevehicle, and at least 25.4 cm (10 in)off the ground.

{ WARNING

The Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system does notreplace driver vision. It cannotdetect:

. Objects that are below thebumper, underneath thevehicle, or too close or farfrom the vehicle.

. Children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper carebefore and while backing, vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Even with URPA, alwayscheck behind the vehicle beforebacking up. While backing, besure to look for objects and checkthe vehicle's mirrors.



How the System Works

URPA comes on automaticallywhen the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 5 mph (8 km/h).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeps arecontinuous.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 25.4 cm (10 in) off the groundand below liftgate level. Objectsmust also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) fromthe rear bumper. This distance maybe less during warmer or humidweather.

The system can be disabled bypressing the rear park aid disablebutton located next to the radio.

The indicator light will come on andPARK ASSIST OFF displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC) toindicate that URPA is off, see ObjectDetection System Messages onpage 5‑42.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

If the URPA system will not activatedue to a temporary condition, themessages PARK ASSIST OFFor PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL will bedisplayed on the DIC.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If thismessage occurs, take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

PARK ASSIST OFF: This messageoccurs if the driver disables thesystem.

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL: Thismessage can occur under thefollowing conditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see “Washing theVehicle” under Exterior Care onpage 10‑98.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.



. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or a bicycle or an objectwas hanging out of the liftgateduring the last drive cycle. Oncethe attached object is removed,URPA will return to normaloperation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The vehicle's bumper isdamaged. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

. Other conditions may affectsystem performance, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)The vehicle may have a Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system. Readthis entire section before using thesystem.

{ WARNING

SBZA is only a lane changing aidand does not replace drivervision. SBZA does not detect:

. Vehicles outside the sideblind zones which may berapidly approaching.

. Pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals.

Failure to use proper care whenchanging lanes may result indamage to the vehicle, injury,or death. Always check theoutside and rearview mirrors,glance over your shoulder, anduse the turn signal beforechanging lanes.

When the system detects a vehiclein the side blind zone, amber SBZAdisplays light up in the side mirrors.This indicates that it may be unsafeto change lanes. Before making alane change, always check theSBZA display, check the outside

and rearview mirrors, look over yourshoulder for vehicles and hazards,and use the turn signal.

SBZA Detection Zones

The SBZA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, 3.5 m(11 ft). This zone starts at each sidemirror and goes back approximately5.0 m (16 ft). The height of thezone is approximately between0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2.0 m (6 ft) off theground.



Use caution while changing laneswhen towing a trailer, as the SBZAdetection zones do not changewhen a trailer is towed.

How the System Works

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror displays will brieflycome on to indicate that the systemis operating. When the vehicle ismoving forward, the left or right sidemirror SBZA display will light up ifa vehicle is detected in that blindzone. If the turn signal is activatedand a vehicle is also detected onthe same side, the SBZA display willflash to give you extra warning notto change lanes.

SBZA displays do not come onwhile the vehicle is approaching orpassing other vehicles. At speedsgreater then 32 km/h (20 mph),SBZA displays may come onwhen a vehicle you have passedremains in or drops back into thedetection zone.

SBZA can be disabled through theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑28 for more information.If the SBZA is disabled by thedriver, the SBZA mirror displays willnot light up during normal driving.

When the System Does Not SeemTo Work Properly

Occasional missed alerts canoccur under normal circumstancesand will increase in wet conditions.The system does not need to beserviced due to an occasionalmissed alert. The number of missedalerts will increase with increasedrainfall or road spray.

If the SBZA displays do not light upwhen the system is on and vehiclesare in the blind zone, the systemmay need service. Take the vehicleto your dealer.

SBZA is designed to ignorestationary objects; however, thesystem may occasionally light updue to guard rails, signs, trees,shrubs, and other stationary objects.This is normal system operation, thevehicle does not need service.

SBZA does not operate when theleft or right corners of the rearbumper are covered with mud,dirt, snow, ice, slush, or inheavy rainstorms. For cleaninginstructions, see “Washing theVehicle” under Exterior Care onpage 10‑98. If the DIC still displaysthe SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS.UNAVAILABLE message aftercleaning the bumper, see yourdealer.



The SBZA displays may remain onif a trailer is attached to the vehicle,or a bicycle or object is extendingout to either side of the vehicle.

When SBZA is disabled for anyreason other than the driver turningit off, the driver will not be able toturn SBZA back on using the DIC.The SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERTON option will not be selectable ifthe conditions for normal systemoperation are not met. Until normaloperating conditions for SBZA aremet, you should not rely upon SBZAwhile driving.

SBZA Error Messages

The following messages mayappear in the DIC:

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERTSYSTEM OFF: This messageindicates that the driver has turnedthe system off.

SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS.UNAVAILABLE: This messageindicates that the SBZA system isdisabled either because the sensoris blocked and cannot detectvehicles in your blind zone, or thevehicle is passing through an openfield of view area, such as thedesert, where there is insufficientdata for operation. The sensor maybe blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,slush, or even heavy rainstorms.This message may also activateduring heavy rain or due to roadspray. The vehicle does not needservice. For cleaning, see “Washingthe Vehicle” under Exterior Care onpage 10‑98.

SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONEALERT SYSTEM: If this messageappears, both SBZA displays willremain on indicating there is aproblem with the SBZA system.If these displays remain on aftercontinued driving, the system needsservice. Take the vehicle to yourdealer.

FCC Information


Frequency of operation:24.05GHz – 24.25GHz

Field Strength: Not greater than2.5V/m peak (0.25V/m average) at adistance of 3m

The manufacturer is notresponsible for any radio orTV interference caused byunauthorized modifications to thisequipment. Such modificationscould void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.



Rear VisionCamera (RVC)This vehicle may have a RearVision Camera system. Read thisentire section before using it.

{ WARNING

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

. Detect objects that areoutside the camera's field ofview, below the bumper,or underneath the vehicle.

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the RVC screen, or usethe screen during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers orwhere there could be cross-traffic.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Your judged distances using thescreen will differ from actualdistances.

If you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you couldhit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death.Even though the vehicle has theRVC system, always checkcarefully before backing up bychecking behind and around thevehicle.

Vehicles Without NavigationSystem

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Whenthe key is in the ON/RUN positionand the driver shifts the vehicle

into R (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on the insiderear view mirror. Once the drivershifts out of R (Reverse), the videoimage automatically disappearsfrom the inside rear view mirror.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem Off or On

To turn off the rear vision camerasystem, press and holdz, locatedon the inside rearview mirror, untilthe left indicator light turns off. Therear camera vision display is nowdisabled.

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on again, press andholdz until the left indicatorlight illuminates. The rear visioncamera system display is nowenabled and the display will appearin the mirror normally.



Vehicles With NavigationSystem

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a viewof the area behind the vehicle.When the driver shifts the vehicleinto R (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on thenavigation screen. Once the drivershifts out of R (Reverse), thenavigation screen will go back to thelast screen that had been displayed,after a delay.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On orOff

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press the MENU button to enterthe configure menu options, thenpress the MENU hard key toselect Display or touch theDisplay screen button.

3. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen will display.

4. Select the Video screen button.When the Video screen buttonis highlighted the RVCsystem is on.

The delay that is received aftershifting out of R (Reverse) isapproximately 10 seconds.The delay can be cancelled byperforming one of the following:. Pressing a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shifting in to P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

5 mph (8 km/h).

There is a message on the rearvision camera screen that states“Check Surroundings for Safety.”



Adjusting the Brightness andContrast of the Screen

To adjust the brightness andcontrast of the screen, press theMENU button while the rear visioncamera image is on the display. Anyadjustments made will only affectthe rear vision camera screen.

] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the brightnessof the screen.

_ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the contrast ofthe screen.

Symbols

The navigation system may havea feature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the navigation screenwhile using the rear vision camera.The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist(URPA) system must not bedisabled to use the caution symbols.If URPA has been disabled and thesymbols have been turned on, theRear Parking Assist SymbolsUnavailable error message maydisplay. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9‑58.

The symbols appear when an objecthas been detected by the URPAsystem. The symbol may cover theobject when viewing the navigationscreen.

To turn the symbols on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.

2. Shift into P (Park).

3. Press the MENU hard keyto enter the configure menuoptions, then press the MENUhard key repeatedly until Displayis selected or touch the Displayscreen button.

4. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen will display.

5. Touch the Symbols screenbutton. The screen button will behighlighted when on.



Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

Service Rear Vision CameraSystem: This message can displaywhen the system is not receivinginformation it requires from othervehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The image is provided by thecamera located above the licenseplate.

The camera uses a special lens.The distance of the image thatappears on the screen differsfrom the actual distance. The areadisplayed by the camera is limited.The camera does not displayobjects which are close to eithercorner of the bumper or under thebumper. The area displayed on thescreen can vary according tovehicle orientation or roadconditions.

The following illustration showsthe field of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.



When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The rear vision camera systemmight not work properly or display aclear image if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the Rear CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is inan accident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to havethe camera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

The rear vision camera systemdisplay in the rearview mirror mayturn off or not appear as expecteddue to one of the followingconditions. If this occurs the leftindicator light on the mirror willflash.. A slow flash may indicate a loss

of video signal, or no videosignal present during the reversecycle.

. A fast flash may indicate thatthe display has been on forthe maximum allowable timeduring a reverse cycle, or thedisplay has reached an OverTemperature limit.

The fast flash conditions areused to protect the videodevice from high temperatureconditions. Once conditionsreturn to normal the device willreset and the green indicator willstop flashing.

During any of these fault conditions,the display will be blank and theindicator will continue to flash aslong as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)or until the conditions return tonormal.

Pressing and holdingz when theleft indicator light is flashing will turnoff the video display along with theleft indicator light.



FuelUse of the recommended fuel isan important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

The eighth digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine.The VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.

Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑70. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑68.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soonas possible. If heavy knocking isheard when using gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.



Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑69 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑21. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.



However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developedby the auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be foundat www.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change,can help clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT);ask the attendant where you buy

gasoline whether the fuel containsMMT. We recommend againstthe use of such gasolines. Fuelscontaining MMT can reduce sparkplug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).For all other vehicles, use only theunleaded gasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑68.

We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.



Many service stations will nothave an 85% ethanol fuel (E85)pump available. The U.S.Department of Energy hasan alternative fuels website(www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/) that can help you findE85 fuel. Those stations that dohave E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do notuse the fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798. Bydefinition, this means that fuellabeled E85 will have an ethanolcontent between 70% and 85%.Filling the fuel tank with fuelmixtures that do not meet ASTMspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

To ensure quick starts in thewintertime, the E85 fuel must beformulated properly for your climateaccording to ASTM specificationD 5798. If you have trouble startingon E85, it could be because theE85 fuel is not properly formulatedfor your climate. If this happens,switching to gasoline or addinggasoline to the fuel tank canimprove starting. For good startingand heater efficiency below 0°C(32°F), the fuel mix in the fueltank should contain no more than70% ethanol. It is best not toalternate repeatedly betweengasoline and E85. If you do switchfuels, it is recommended that youadd as much fuel as possible — donot add less than 11 L (3 gal) whenrefueling. You should drive thevehicle immediately after refuelingfor at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow thevehicle to adapt to the change inethanol concentration.

E85 has less energy per liter(gallon) than gasoline, so you willneed to refill the fuel tank moreoften when using E85 than whenyou are using gasoline. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9‑72.

Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.



Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle. If thevehicle has E85 fuel capability, thefuel cap will be yellow and statethat E85 or gasoline can be used.See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑70.

To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.



{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you ifyou open the fuel cap tooquickly. If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you couldbe badly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank andwait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑98.

When replacing the fuel cap,insert the tether in its hole beforetightening the cap. Turn the fuel capclockwise until it clicks. It will requiremore effort to turn the fuel cap onthe last turn as you tighten it. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑21.

If the vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC), theTIGHTEN GAS CAP messagedisplays if the fuel cap is notproperly installed.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer.The wrong type of fuel cap mightnot fit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑21.



Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment thathas been designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving

while towing a trailer, see“Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipmentto tow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”



For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑93. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑93.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many different laws,

including speed limit restrictions,having to do with trailering.Make sure the rig will be legal,not only where you live butalso where you will be driving.A good source for thisinformation can be state orprovincial police.

. Consider using a sway control.See “Hitches” in TowingEquipment on page 9‑84.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 800 km (500 miles) thenew vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts of thevehicle wear in at the heavierloads.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often under heavy loadsand/or hilly conditions.

. If the vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system andit doesn't seem to be workingproperly while pulling a trailer,turn the system off. See SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) onpage 9‑60 for more information.

Important considerations that haveto do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The weight on the vehicle's tires. And the weight of the trailering

combination



Driving with a Trailer

{ WARNING

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rearof the vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

To maximize safety when towinga trailer:

. Have the exhaust systeminspected for leaks and makenecessary repairs beforestarting a trip.

. Never drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Fully open the air outletson or under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑36.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailerhitch parts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors,lamps, tires and mirrors. If thetrailer has electric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavybraking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination will not accelerateas quickly and is longer so it isnecessary to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforereturning to the lane.



Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, to movethe trailer to the left, move that handto the left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do thisso the trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

If the trailer turn signal bulbs burnout, the arrows on the instrumentpanel will still flash for turns. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down,the brakes might get hot and nolonger work well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

The tow/haul mode may be used ifthe transmission shifts too often.See Tow/Haul Mode Light onpage 5‑25.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with theautomatic transmission in P (Park)for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 10‑21.



Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hillwith the trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regular brakesuntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. If the vehicle is four-wheel-driveand has a two-speed transfercase, be sure the transfer caseis in a drive gear and not inN (Neutral).

6. Release the brake pedal.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehiclecan roll.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the engine has been leftrunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when on fairlylevel ground, use the steps thatfollow.

Always put the shift lever fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If the transfer case on afour-wheel-drive vehicle is inN (Neutral), the vehicle will befree to roll, even if the shift leveris in P (Park). Be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — not inN (Neutral).



Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Schedule orIndex for more information. Thingsthat are especially important intrailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer TowingIf the vehicle has a hybrid engine,see the Hybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Do not tow a trailer during break‐in.See New Vehicle Break-In onpage 9‑28 for more information.

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer istoo heavy, the brakes may notwork well— or even at all. Thedriver and passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

only if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailerimproperly can damage thevehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” that appearslater in this section.



Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling atrailer.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature and how muchthe vehicle is used to pull a trailerare all important. It can depend onany special equipment on thevehicle, and the amount of tongueweight the vehicle can carry. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section for more information.

Trailer weight rating (TWR) iscalculated assuming the tow vehiclehas only the driver but all requiredtrailering equipment. Weight ofadditional optional equipment,passengers and cargo in the towvehicle must be subtracted from thetrailer weight rating.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

1500 Series 2WD Short Wheel Base

5.3LV8 (LC9) 3.08 2 540 kg (5,600 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)

5.3LV8 (LMG) 3.08 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)

5.3LV8 3.42 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)

5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)

1500 Series 2WD Long Wheel Base

5.3LV8 3.08 2 313 kg (5,100 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)

5.3LV8 3.42 2 540 kg (5,600 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)


1500 Series 4WD Short Wheel Base

5.3LV8 3.08 2 359 kg (5,200 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)

5.3LV8 3.42 2 586 kg (5,700 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)



5.3LV8 (LC9) 3.08 2 268 kg (5,000 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)

5.3LV8 3.42 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)




Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*


6.0LV8 3.73 4 355 kg (9,600 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)


6.0LV8 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices,See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13‑3.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isvery important because it is alsopart of the vehicle weight. TheGross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo carried in it, andthe people who will be riding in thevehicle as well as trailer tongue

weight. Vehicle options, equipment,passengers and cargo in the vehiclereduce the amount of tongue weightthe vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight the vehiclecan tow. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23 for more informationabout the vehicle's maximum loadcapacity.



Trailer tongue weight (A) should be10 percent to 15 percent and fifthwheel or gooseneck kingpin weightshould be 15 to 25 percent of theloaded trailer weight (B) up to themaximums for vehicle series andhitch type shown below:

Vehicle Series Hitch TypeMaximum Tongue

Weight

1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lbs)

2500 Weight Carrying 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

1500 Weight Distributing 499 kg (1,100 lbs)

2500 Weight Distributing 680 kg (1,500 lbs)

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue or kingpin weightcannot cause the vehicle to exceed

the GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) or the RGAWR (Rear GrossAxle Weight Rating). See “TotalWeight on the Vehicle's Tires” laterin this section for more information.

After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.



Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the inflation pressuresfound on the Certification labelon the drivers door or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑23 for moreinformation. Make sure not toexceed the GVWR limit for thevehicle, or the RGAWR, with the towvehicle and trailer fully loaded forthe trip including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using a weightdistributing hitch, make sure not toexceed the RGAWR before applyingthe weight distribution spring bars.

Weight of the TraileringCombination

It is important that the combinationof the tow vehicle and trailerdoes not exceed any of its weightratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Trailer Weight Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the tow vehicle and

trailer combination, fully loaded forthe trip, getting individual weightsfor each of these items.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

The correct hitch equipment helpsmaintain combination control. Mostsmall-to-medium trailers can betowed with a weight carrying hitchwhich simply features a couplerlatched to the hitch ball. Largertrailers may require a weightdistributing hitch that uses springbars to distribute the trailer tongueweight among the two vehicle andtrailer axles. See “Weight of theTrailer Tongue” in Trailer Towing onpage 9‑79 for rating limits withvarious hitch types.

Consider using sway controlswith any trailer. Ask a traileringprofessional about sway controls orrefer to the trailer manufacturer'srecommendations and instructions.

Weight‐Distributing HitchAdjustment

A. Body to Ground Distance

B. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the spring bars should beadjusted so the distance (A) is thesame after coupling the trailer to thetow vehicle and adjusting the hitch.



Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongueof the trailer to help prevent thetongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. If the trailer beingtowed weighs up to 2 271 kg(5,000 lbs) with a factory-installedstep bumper, safety chains maybe attached to the attaching pointson the bumper, otherwise, safetychains should be attached to holeson the trailer hitch platform. Alwaysleave just enough slack so thecombination can turn. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 900 kg (2,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Since the vehicle is equipped withStabiliTrak®, the trailer brakescannot tap into the vehicle'shydraulic system.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The vehicle is equipped with thefollowing wiring harnesses fortowing a trailer.

Basic Trailer Wiring

The trailer wiring harness, with aseven-pin connector, is located atthe rear of the vehicle and is tied tothe vehicle's frame. The harnessconnector can be plugged into aseven-pin universal heavy-dutytrailer connector available throughyour dealer.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Brown: Taillamps. White: Ground. Light Green: Back-up Lamps. Red: Battery Feed*. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuses for these two circuitsare installed in the underhoodelectrical center, but the wires arenot connected. They should beconnected by your dealer or aqualified service center.



Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring HarnessPackage

The vehicle is equipped with theseven-wire trailer towing harness.This harness with a seven-pinuniversal trailer connector isattached to a bracket on the hitchplatform.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Brown: Taillamps

. White: Ground

. Light Green: Back-up Lamps

. Red: Battery Feed*

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuses for these two circuitsare installed in the underhoodelectrical center, but the wires arenot connected. They should beconnected by your dealer or aqualified service center.

If charging a remote (non-vehicle)battery, press the tow/haul modebutton located at the end of the shiftlever. This will boost the vehiclesystem voltage and properly chargethe battery. If the trailer is too lightfor tow/haul mode, turn on theheadlamps as a second way toboost the vehicle system andcharge the battery.

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

These wiring provisions areincluded with the vehicle as part ofthe trailer wiring package. Theseprovisions are for an electric brakecontroller. The instrument panelcontains blunt cut wires near thedata link connector for the trailerbrake controller. The harnesscontains the following wires:. Dark Blue: Brake Signal to

Trailer Connector. Red/Black: Battery. Light Blue/White: Brake Switch. White: Ground

It should be installed by your dealeror a qualified service center.

If the vehicle is equipped with anITBC, the blunt cuts exist, butare not connected further in theharness. If an aftermarket trailerbrake controller is installed, theITBC must be disconnected.



Do not power both ITBC andaftermarket controllers to control thetrailer brakes at the same time.

Tow/Haul Mode

Pressing this button at the end ofthe shift lever turns on and off thetow/haul mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when thetow/haul mode is on.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑42 for moreinformation.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” earlier inthe section. Tow/Haul is most usefulunder the following drivingconditions:. When pulling a heavy trailer or

a large or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in stop andgo traffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer ora large or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with notrailer at all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit tothe selection of Tow/Haul whenthe vehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded mayresult in unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.

Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System

The vehicle may have an IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) systemfor electric trailer brakes.



This symbol is located on the TrailerBrake Control Panel on vehicleswith an Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System. The power outputto the trailer brakes is based on theamount of brake pressure beingapplied by the vehicle’s brakesystem. This available power outputto the trailer brakes can be adjustedto a wide range of traileringsituations.

The ITBC system is integratedwith the vehicle’s brake, anti‐lockbrake and StabiliTrak systems.In trailering conditions that causethe vehicle’s anti‐lock brake orStabiliTrak systems to activate,power sent to the trailer's brakeswill be automatically adjusted tominimize trailer wheel lock-up. Thisdoes not imply that the trailer hasthe StabiliTrak system.

If the vehicle’s brake, anti‐lockbrake or StabiliTrak systems arenot functioning properly, the ITBCsystem may not be fully functionalor may not function at all. Makesure all of these systems arefully operational to ensure fullfunctionality of the ITBC system.

The ITBC system is poweredthrough the vehicle's electricalsystem. Turning the ignition offwill also turn off the ITBC system.The ITBC system is fully functionalonly when the ignition is in ON orin RUN.

The ITBC system can only be usedwith trailers with electric brakes.

{ WARNING

Connecting a trailer that is notcompatible with the ITBC systemmay result in reduced or completeloss of trailer braking. Theremay be an increase in stoppingdistance or trailer instability whichcould result in personal injury ordamage to the vehicle, trailer,or other property. An aftermarketcontroller may be available foruse with trailers with surge,air, or electric‐over‐hydraulictrailer brake systems. Todetermine the type of brakeson the trailer and the availabilityof controllers, check with yourtrailer manufacturer or dealer.



When trailering, make sure of thefollowing:. The ITBC system is used only

with trailers that are equippedwith electric brakes.

. All applicable local and federallaws and regulations arefollowed.

. All electrical and mechanicalconnections to the trailer aremade correctly.

. The trailer’s brakes are in properworking condition.

. The trailer and vehicle areproperly loaded for the towingcondition.

The ITBC system is a factoryinstalled item. Out‐of‐factoryinstallation of this system should notbe attempted. GM is not responsiblefor warranty or performance of thesystem resulting from out‐of‐factoryinstallation.

Trailer Brake Control Panel

A. Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever

B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons

The ITBC system has a controlpanel located on the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringcolumn. The control panel allowsadjustment to the amount of output,

referred to as trailer gain, availableto the electric trailer brakes andallows manual application the trailerbrakes. The Trailer Brake ControlPanel is used along with the TrailerBrake Display Page on the DIC toadjust and display power output tothe trailer brakes.

Trailer Brake DIC Display Page

The ITBC system displaysmessages into the vehicle’s DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑28 for more information.

The display page indicatesTrailer Gain setting, power outputto the electric trailer brakes, trailerconnection and system operationalstatus.



The Trailer Brake Display Page canbe displayed by performing any ofthe following actions:. Scrolling through the DIC

menu pages using the odometertrip stem or the DIC VehicleInformation button (if equipped).

. Pressing a Trailer Gainbutton – If the Trailer BrakeDisplay Page is not currentlydisplayed, pressing a TrailerGain button will first recall thecurrent Trailer Gain setting.After the Trailer Brake DisplayPage is displayed, each pressand release of the gain buttonswill then cause the Trailer Gainsetting to change.

. Activating the Manual TrailerBrake Apply lever

. Connecting a trailer equippedwith electric trailer brakes

All DIC warning and servicemessages must first beacknowledged by the driverby pressing the odometer tripstem or the DIC Vehicle Informationbutton (if equipped) before theTrailer Brake Display Page can bedisplayed and Trailer Gain can beadjusted.

TRAILER GAIN – This setting isdisplayed anytime the Trailer BrakeDisplay Page is active. This settingcan be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0with either a trailer connected ordisconnected. To adjust the TrailerGain, press one of the Trailer Gainadjustment buttons located on theTrailer Brake Control Panel. Pressand hold a gain button to cause theTrailer Gain to continuously adjust.To turn the output to the trailer off,adjust the Trailer Gain setting to0.0 (zero).

0.0 (zero) gain is the factorydefault setting. To properly adjusttrailer gain, see the Trailer GainAdjustment Procedure later in thissection.

TRAILER OUTPUT – This isdisplayed any time a trailer withelectric brakes is connected.Output to the electric brakes isbased on the amount of vehiclebraking present and relative tothe Trailer Gain setting. Output isdisplayed from 0 to 10 bars for eachgain setting.

The Trailer Output willindicate “- - - - - -“ on theTrailer Brake Display Pagewhenever the following occur:. No trailer is connected.. A trailer without electric brakes

is connected (no DIC messageis displayed).

. A trailer with electric brakeshas become disconnected(a CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage will also be displayedon the DIC).



. There is a fault present in thewiring to the electric trailerbrakes (a CHECK TRAILERWIRING message will also bedisplayed on the DIC).

. There is a fault in the ITBCsystem (a SERVICE TRAILERBRAKE SYSTEM message willalso be displayed in the DIC).

Manual Trailer Brake Apply

The Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever is located on the TrailerBrake Control Panel and is used toapply the trailer’s electric brakesindependent of the vehicle’s brakes.This lever is used in the Trailer GainAdjustment Procedure to properlyadjust the power output to the trailerbrakes. Sliding the lever to the leftwill apply only the trailer brakes.The power output to the trailer isindicated in the Trailer BrakeDisplay Page in the DIC. If thevehicle’s service brakes are applied

while using the Manual Trailer BrakeApply Lever, the trailer output powerwill be the greater of the two.

The trailer and the vehicle's brakelamps will come on when eithervehicle braking or manual trailerbrakes are applied.

Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure

Trailer Gain should be set for aspecific trailering condition andmust be adjusted any time vehicleloading, trailer loading or roadsurface conditions change.

Setting the Trailer Gain properlyis needed for the best trailerstopping performance. A trailerthat is over-gained may result inlocked trailer brakes. A trailer thatis under-gained may result in notenough trailer braking. Both of theseconditions may result in poorerstopping and stability of the vehicleand trailer.

Use the following procedure tocorrectly adjust Trailer Gain for eachtowing condition:

1. Make sure the trailer brakes arein proper working condition.

2. Connect a properly loadedtrailer to the vehicle and makeall necessary mechanical andelectrical connections. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23 for more information.

3. After the electrical connection ismade to a trailer equipped withelectric brakes:. A TRAILER CONNECTED

message will be brieflydisplayed on the DICdisplay.

. The Trailer Brake DisplayPage will appear on theDIC showing TRAILERGAIN and TRAILEROUTPUT.



. In the Trailer Output displayon the DIC, “- - - - - -“ willdisappear if there is noerror present. Connectinga trailer without electricbrakes will not clear thesix dashed lines.

4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by usingthe gain adjustment (+ / -)buttons on the Trailer BrakeControl Panel.

5. Drive the vehicle with thetrailer attached on a level roadsurface representative of thetowing condition and free oftraffic at about 32 to 40 km/h(20 to 25 mph) and fully applythe Manual Trailer Brake Applylever.

Adjusting trailer gain at speedslower than 32 to 40 km/h(20 to 25 mph) may result in anincorrect gain setting.

6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to justbelow the point of trailer wheellock-up, indicated by trailerwheel squeal or tire smoke whena trailer wheel locks.

Trailer wheel lock-up may notoccur if towing a heavily loadedtrailer. In this case, adjust theTrailer Gain to the highestallowable setting for the towingcondition.

7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any timevehicle loading, trailer loading orroad surface conditions changeor if trailer wheel lock-up isnoticed at any time while towing

Other ITBC Related DIC Messages

In addition to displaying TRAILERGAIN and TRAILER OUTPUTthrough the DIC, trailer connectionand ITBC system status is displayedin the DIC.

TRAILER CONNECTED – Thismessage will be briefly displayedwhen a trailer with electric brakes isfirst connected to the vehicle. Thismessage will automatically turn offin about ten seconds. The drivercan also acknowledge this messagebefore it automatically turns off.

CHECK TRAILER WIRING – Thismessage will be displayed if:

1. The ITBC system firstdetermines connection to atrailer with electric brakes andthen the trailer harness becomesdisconnected from the vehicle.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stationary, thismessage will automaticallyturn off in about thirty seconds.This message will also turn off ifthe driver acknowledges thismessage off or if the trailerharness is re-connected.



If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage will continue untilthe ignition is turned off. Thismessage will also turn off ifthe driver acknowledges thismessage off or if the trailerharness is re-connected.

2. There is an electrical fault inthe wiring to the electric trailerbrakes. This message willcontinue as long as there isan electrical fault in the trailerwiring. This message willalso turn off if the driveracknowledges this message off.

To determine if the electrical faultis on the vehicle side or trailerside of the trailer wiring harnessconnection, do the following:

1. Disconnect the trailer wiringharness from the vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition OFF.

3. Wait ten seconds, then turn theignition back to RUN.

4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage re-appears, theelectrical fault is on thevehicle side.

If the CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage only re-appears whenconnecting the trailer wiringharness to the vehicle, theelectrical fault is on thetrailer side.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM – This message willbe displayed when there is aproblem with the ITBC system.If this message persists overmultiple ignition cycles there isproblem with the ITBC system.Take the vehicle to an authorizedGM dealer to have the ITBC systemdiagnosed and repaired.

If either the CHECK TRAILERWIRING or SERVICE TRAILERBRAKE SYSTEM message isdisplayed while driving the vehicle,power is no longer available tothe trailer brakes. When trafficconditions allow, carefully pull thevehicle over to the side of the roadand turn the ignition off. Check thewiring connection to the trailer andturn the ignition back on. If either ofthese messages continues, eitherthe vehicle or trailer needs service.

An authorized GM dealer maybe able to diagnose and repairproblems with the trailer. However,any diagnosis and repair of thetrailer is not covered under thevehicle warranty. Please contactyour trailer dealer for assistancewith trailer repairs and trailerwarranty information.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑51 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑52.

Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar EquipmentBefore installing a snow plow on thevehicle, here are some things youneed to know:

Notice: If the vehicle doesnot have the snow plow preppackage, adding a plow candamage the vehicle, and therepairs would not be coveredby warranty. Unless the vehiclewas built to carry a snow plow,do not add one to the vehicle.If the vehicle has the snow plowprep package, called RPO VYU,then the payload the vehicle cancarry will be reduced when asnow plow is installed. Thevehicle can be damaged if eitherthe front or rear axle ratings orthe Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)are exceeded.

Some vehicles are built with aspecial snow plow prep package,called RPO VYU. If the vehicle hasthis option, you can add a plow to it,provided certain weights, such asthe weights on the vehicle's axlesand the Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW), are not exceeded.

The plow the vehicle can carrydepends on many things, such as:. The options the vehicle came

with, and the weight of thoseoptions.

. The weight and number ofpassengers intended to becarried.

. The weight of items added to thevehicle.

. The total weight of anyadditional cargo intended to becarried.



Say, for example, you have a 318 kg(700 lb) snow plow. The total weightof all occupants and cargo insidethe cab should not exceed 135 kg(300 lb). This means that you mayonly be able to carry one passenger.But, even this may be too much ifthere is other equipment alreadyadding to the weight of the vehicle.

Here are some guidelines for safelycarrying a snow plow on the vehicle:. Make sure the weight on the

front and rear axles does notexceed the axle rating for each.

. For the front axle, if more cargoor passengers must be carried,appropriate counter ballast mustbe installed rear of the rear axle.Counter ballast must be properlysecured so it will not moveduring driving.

. Follow the snow plowmanufacturer'srecommendations regardingrear ballast. Rear ballast maybe required to ensure a properfront and rear weight distributionratio, even though the actualweight at the front axle may beless than the front axle rating.

. The snow plow manufactureror installer can assist indetermining the amount of rearballast required, to help makesure the snowplow/vehiclecombination does not exceedthe GVW rating, the front andrear axle ratings, and the frontand rear weight distribution ratio.

. The total vehicle must notexceed the GVW rating.

Front axle reserve capacity is thedifference between the front GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) and thefront axle weight of the vehicle withfull fuel and passengers. Basically, itis the amount of weight that can beadded to the front axle beforereaching the front GAWR.

The front axle reserve capacityfor the vehicle can be foundin the lower right corner of theCertification/Tire label, as shown.

United States



Canada

In order to calculate the amount ofweight any front accessory, such asa snow plow, is adding to the frontaxle, use the following formula:

(W x (A +W.B.)) /W.B.= Weightthe accessory is adding to thefront axle.

Where:W = Weight of added accessoryA = Distance that the accessoryis in front of the front axleW.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase

For example, adding a 318 kg(700 lb) snow plow actually addsmore than 318 kg (700 lb) to thefront axle. Using the formula, if thesnow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front ofthe front axle and the wheel base is305 cm (10 ft), then:

W = 318 kg (700 lb)A = 122 cm (4 ft)W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft)

(W x (A +W.B.))/W.B. =(318 x (122 + 305))/305 = 445 kg(980 lb)

So, if the vehicle's front axle reservecapacity is more than 980 lbs(445 kg), the snow plow couldbe added without exceeding thefront GAWR.

Heavier equipment can be addedon the front of the vehicle if it iscompensated for by carrying fewerpassengers, less cargo, or bypositioning cargo toward the rear.



This has the effect of reducing theload on the front. However, the frontGAWR, rear GAWR, and the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)must never be exceeded.

{ WARNING

On some vehicles that havecertain front mounted equipment,such as a snow plow, it may bepossible to load the front axle tothe front gross axle weight rating(GAWR) but not have enoughweight on the rear axle to haveproper braking performance. Ifthe brakes cannot work properly,you could have a crash. Tohelp the brakes work properlywhen a snow plow is installed,always follow the snow plowmanufacturer or installer'srecommendation for rear ballastto ensure a proper front and rearweight distribution ratio, eventhough the actual front weight

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

may be less than the frontGAWR, and the total vehicleweight is less than the grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR).Maintaining a proper front andrear weight distribution ratio isnecessary to provide properbraking performance.

Total vehicle reserve capacity isthe difference between the GVWRand the weight of the vehicle withfull fuel and passengers. It is theamount of weight that can be addedto the vehicle before reachingtheGVWR. Keep in mind thatreserve capacity numbers areintended as a guide when selectingthe amount of equipment or cargothe vehicle can carry. If you areunsure of the vehicle's front, rear,or total weight, go to a weigh stationand weigh the vehicle. Your dealercan also help you with this.

The total vehicle reserve capacityfor the vehicle can be foundin the lower right corner of theCertification/Tire label as shownpreviously.

See your dealer for additionaladvice and information about usinga snow plow on the vehicle. Also,see Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23.

Emergency Roof LampProvisions

Vehicles with the RPO VYU snowplow prep package also have anemergency roof lamp provisionpackage, RPO TRW. Wiring for theemergency roof lamp is providedabove the overhead console. SeeAuxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp onpage 6‑6 for switch location.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2CaliforniaProposition 65 Warning . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-15Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-21

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-24Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-32Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-33

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-34

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-38Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-50Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58


10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-68Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Secondary Latch System . . . 10-84Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-87

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-93Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105

General InformationFor service and parts needs,visit your dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:


Vehicle Care 10-3

CaliforniaProposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performanceand safety, including such thingsas airbags, braking, stability, rideand handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications orthe installation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer can accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories.When you go to your GM dealerand ask for GM Accessories, youwill know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuine GMAccessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑52.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService WorkIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. Metric and Englishfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, partscan later break or fall off.You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑12.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Airbag SystemCheck on page 3‑53.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed.See Maintenance Records onpage 11‑10.


Vehicle Care 10-5

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is located inside thevehicle to the lower left of thesteering wheel. 2. Then go to the front of the

vehicle and locate the secondaryhood release, near the center ofthe grille.

3. Push the secondary hoodrelease to the right.

4. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Then bring the hood from fullopen to within 152 mm (6 in)from the closed position, pause,then push the front center of thehood with a swift, firm motion tofully close the hood.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

5.3 L V8 Engine Shown, 6.0 L V8 Engine Similar


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑15.

B. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10‑16.

C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑88.

D. Battery on page 10‑28.

E. Remote Negative (−) Terminal(Out of View). See JumpStarting on page 10‑88.

F. Automatic TransmissionDipstick (Out of View). See“Checking the Fluid Level”under Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑12.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑7.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking EngineOil” under Engine Oil onpage 10‑7.

I. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10‑16.

J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑24.

K. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brake Fluid onpage 10‑27.

L. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑41.

M. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑25.


Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engineoil. Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑10.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.


10-8 Vehicle Care

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a yellowloop. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section for an explanationof what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too muchoil. Oil levels above or belowthe acceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find thatyou have an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatched

area that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade:

Specification

Use and ask for engine oils withthe dexos™ certification mark. Oilsmeeting the requirements of thevehicle should have the dexoscertification mark on the container.


Vehicle Care 10-9

This certification mark indicates thatthe oil has been approved to thedexos specification.

This vehicle was filled at the factorywith dexos‐approved engine oil.

Notice: Use only engine oilthat is approved to the dexosspecification or an equivalentengine oil of the appropriateviscosity grade. Engineoils approved to the dexosspecification will show thedexos symbol on the container.Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent canresult in engine damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

If you are unsure whether theoil is approved to the dexosspecification, ask your serviceprovider.

Use of Substitute Engine Oils ifdexos is unavailable: In the eventthat dexos‐approved engine oil isnot available at an oil change or formaintaining proper oil level, youmay use substitute engine oildisplaying the API Starburst symboland of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.Use of oils that do not meet thedexos specification, however, mayresult in reduced performance undercertain circumstances.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do notuse other viscosity oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation:In an area of extreme cold,where the temperature fallsbelow −29°C (−20°F), anSAE 0W-30 oil should be used.


10-10 Vehicle Care

An oil of this viscosity grade willprovide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,be sure to always select an oil thatmeets the required specification,dexos. See “Specification” earlier inthis section for more information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

On some vehicles, when thesystem has calculated that oil lifehas been diminished, a CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes on to indicate that an oilchange is necessary. See EngineOil Messages on page 5‑41.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).


Vehicle Care 10-11

It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that anoil change is not necessary forup to a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at leastonce a year and, at this time, thesystem must be reset. For vehicleswithout the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message, an oil changeis needed when the OIL LIFEREMAINING percentage is near0%. Your dealer has trained servicepeople who will perform this workand reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil ischanged.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. Always reset theengine oil life to 100% after every oilchange. It will not reset itself. Toreset the system on most vehicles:

1. Display the OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC.If the vehicle does not haveDIC buttons, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) to access thisdisplay. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑28.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESETbutton on the DIC, or the tripodometer reset stem if thevehicle does not have DICbuttons, for more thanfive seconds. The oil lifewill change to 100%.

On all vehicles, the Engine Oil LifeSystem can be reset as follows:


2. Fully press the accelerator pedalslowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. Display the OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. If thedisplay shows 100%, the systemis reset. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑28.

If the vehicle has a CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message andit comes back on when the vehicleis started and/or the OIL LIFEREMAINING is near 0%, the engineoil life system has not been reset.Repeat the procedure.


10-12 Vehicle Care

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary tocheck the transmission fluid level.The only reason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. If a small leak issuspected, then use the followingchecking procedures to check thefluid level. However, if there is alarge leak, then it may be necessaryto have the vehicle towed to adealer service department and haveit repaired before driving the vehiclefurther.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluidmay damage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmissionto overheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Before checking the fluid level,prepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Start the engine and park thevehicle on a level surface. Keepthe engine running.

2. Apply the parking brake andplace the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for about three secondsin each range. Then, move theshift lever back to P (Park).

4. Allow the engine to idle(500 – 800 rpm) for at least1 minute. Slowly release thebrake pedal.

5. Keep the engine running andpress the Trip/Fuel button ortrip odometer reset stem untilTRANS TEMP (TransmissionTemperature) displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC).


Vehicle Care 10-13

6. Using the TRANS TEMPreading, determine andperform the appropriate checkprocedure. If the TRANS TEMPreading is not within the requiredtemperature ranges, allow thevehicle to cool, or operate thevehicle until the appropriatetransmission fluid temperature isreached.

Cold Check Procedure

Use this procedure only as areference to determine if thetransmission has enough fluid to beoperated safely until a hot checkprocedure can be made. The hotcheck procedure is the mostaccurate method to check thefluid level. Perform the hot checkprocedure at the first opportunity.Use this cold check procedureto check fluid level when thetransmission temperature isbetween 27°C and 32°C(80°F and 90°F).

1. Locate the transmissiondipstick at the rear of the enginecompartment, on the passengerside of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation.

2. Flip the handle up, then pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushingit back in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstickand read the lower level. Repeatthe check procedure to verify thereading.

5. If the fluid level is below theCOLD check band, add onlyenough fluid as necessary tobring the level into the COLDband. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pt). Do not overfill.

6. Perform a hot check at thefirst opportunity after thetransmission reaches a normaloperating temperature between71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F).

7. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way,then flip the handle down tolock the dipstick in place.


10-14 Vehicle Care

Hot Check Procedure

Use this procedure to check thetransmission fluid level when thetransmission fluid temperatureis between 71°C and 93°C(160°F and 200°F).

The hot check is the most accuratemethod to check the fluid level. Thehot check should be performed atthe first opportunity in order to verifythe cold check. The fluid level risesas fluid temperature increases,so it is important to ensure thetransmission temperature is withinrange.

1. Locate the transmissiondipstick at the rear of theengine compartment, on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation.

2. Flip the handle up, then pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushingit back in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstickand read the lower level. Repeatthe check procedure to verify thereading.

5. Safe operating level is within theHOT cross hatch band on thedipstick. If the fluid level is notwithin the HOT band, and the

transmission temperature isbetween 71°C and 93°C(160°F and 200°F), add or drainfluid as necessary to bring thelevel into the HOT band. If thefluid level is low, add onlyenough fluid to bring the levelinto the HOT band. It does nottake much fluid, generally lessthan 0.5 L (1 pt). Do not overfill.

6. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way,then flip the handle down tolock the dipstick in place.


Vehicle Care 10-15

Consistency of Readings

Always check the fluid level at leasttwice using the procedure describedpreviously. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintainingproper fluid level. If readings are stillinconsistent, contact the dealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

Inspect the air cleaner/filterat the scheduled maintenanceintervals and replace it at thefirst oil change after each 80 000 km(50,000 mi) interval. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 for moreinformation. If driving on dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the engine air cleaner/filterfrom the vehicle by followingSteps 1 through 6. When the engineair cleaner/filter is removed, lightlyshake it to release loose dust anddirt. If the engine air cleaner/filterremains covered with dirt, anew filter is required. Never usecompressed air to clean the filter.

Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly . See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

2. Loosen the four screws on thecover of the housing and lift upthe cover.


10-16 Vehicle Care

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Careshould be taken to dislodge aslittle dirt as possible.

4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and thehousing.

5. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

6. Reinstall the cover and tightenthe screws.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause youor others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Cooling SystemIf the vehicle is a hybrid, seethe hybrid supplement for moreinformation.

The cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

5.3 L V8 Engine Shown,6.0 L V8 Engine Similar

A. Coolant Surge Tank

B. Coolant Surge TankPressure Cap

C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)(Out of View)


Vehicle Care 10-17

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not run the engine if there isa leak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑21.


10-18 Vehicle Care

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection upto 129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/oradditives are used in the vehiclecooling system, the vehiclecould be damaged. Use only theproper mixture of the enginecoolant listed in this manualfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 for moreinformation.

Never dispose of engine coolantby putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, or into sewers,streams, or bodies of water.Have the coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.


Vehicle Care 10-19

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at orabove the FULL COLD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before thisis done.

The coolant surge tank is locatedin the engine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.

The coolant level should be at orabove the FULL COLD mark. If it isnot, the vehicle may have a leak inthe cooling system.

How to Add Coolant to theSurge Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.


10-20 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids froma hot cooling system can blowout and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if youturn the surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant as follows:

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means thereis still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the FULLCOLD mark.


Vehicle Care 10-21

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the FULLCOLD mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap ishand-tight and fully seated.

6. Verify coolant level after engineis shut off and the coolant iscold. If necessary, repeat coolantfill procedure Steps 1 through 6.

Notice: If the pressure cap isnot tightly installed, coolant lossand possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperaturegauge on your vehicle's instrumentpanel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑16.

In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE, ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, anda ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDmessage comes on in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) on theinstrument panel. See EngineCooling System Messages onpage 5‑40 and Engine PowerMessages on page 5‑41.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,but instead get service help rightaway. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑6.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered bythe vehicle warranty. SeeOverheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 10‑23for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

Notice: If the engine catches firewhile driving with no coolant, thevehicle can be badly damaged.The costly repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑23 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Turn it offand get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steamor coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned.Stop the engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑23 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage, along with a low coolantcondition, can indicate a seriousproblem.

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.


Vehicle Care 10-23

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer. See TrailerTowing on page 9‑79.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let theengine idle in N (Neutral)while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift toP (Park) or N (Neutral) and letthe engine idle.

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zoneor an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pullover, stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idlethe engine for three minuteswhile parked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”later in this section.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine conditionexists and the ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED message is displayed,an overheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylindershelps prevent engine damage. Inthis mode, a loss in power andengine performance will be noticed.This operating mode allows thevehicle to be driven to a safe placein an emergency. Driving extended

distances and/or towing a trailerin the overheat protection modeshould be avoided.

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair.The engine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑7.

Engine FanIf the vehicle has a clutchedengine cooling fan, when the clutchis engaged, the fan spins faster toprovide more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving conditions,the fan is spinning slower andthe clutch is not fully engaged.


10-24 Vehicle Care

This improves fuel economy andreduces fan noise. Under heavyvehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures, thefan speed increases as the clutchmore fully engages, so an increasein fan noise may be heard. This isnormal and should not be mistakenas the transmission slipping ormaking extra shifts. It is merely thecooling system functioning properly.The fan will slow down whenadditional cooling is not requiredand the clutch disengages.

This fan noise may also be heardwhen starting the engine. It will goaway as the fan clutch partiallydisengages.

If the vehicle has electric coolingfans, the fans may be heardspinning at low speed during mosteveryday driving. The fans mayturn off if no cooling is required.Under heavy vehicle loading, trailertowing, high outside temperatures,

or operation of the air conditioningsystem, the fans may change tohigh speed and an increase in fannoise may be heard. This isnormal and indicates that thecooling system is functioningproperly. The fans will change tolow speed when additional coolingis no longer required.

Power Steering FluidIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.


Vehicle Care 10-25

The level should be at the FULLCOLD mark. If necessary, add onlyenough fluid to bring the level up tothe mark.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washerfluid message on the DIC thatcomes on when the washer fluid islow. The message is displayed for15 seconds at the start of eachignition cycle. When the WASHERFLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagedisplays, washer fluid will need tobe added to the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. Thisallows for fluid expansionif freezing occurs, whichcould damage the tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.


10-26 Vehicle Care

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be asign that brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct aleak. If fluid is added when thelinings are worn, there will be toomuch fluid when new brake liningsare installed. Add or remove brakefluid, as necessary, only when workis done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking BrakeFluid” in this section.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑23.

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check thebrake fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.


10-28 Vehicle Care

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above the MIN but not overthe MAX mark.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluidcan badly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few dropsof mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful notto spill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Refer to the replacement numberon the original battery label whena new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for battery location.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that canburn you and gas that canexplode. You can be badly hurt ifyou are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 10‑88 for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 to determine when tocheck the lubricant.

How to Check Lubricant

Active Transfer Case

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole, some lubricant willneed to be added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug hole. Use carenot to overtighten the plug.

When to Change Lubricant

Refer to Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 to determine how often tochange the lubricant.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7 todetermine what kind of lubricantto use.


10-30 Vehicle Care

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck front axle fluid unless a leakis suspected, or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.


To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

1500 Series

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug

All Except 1500 Series

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug. When the differential is cold, add

enough lubricant to raise thelevel from 0mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm(1/8 in) below the fill plug hole.

. When the differential is atoperating temperature (warm),add enough lubricant to raisethe level to the bottom of the fillplug hole.


Vehicle Care 10-31

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7 todetermine what kind of lubricantto use.

Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless thereis a leak suspected, or an unusualnoise is heard. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.

All axle assemblies are filled byvolume of fluid during production.They are not filled to reach a certainlevel. When checking the fluidlevel on any axle, variations in thereadings can be caused by factoryfill differences between the minimumand the maximum fluid volume.Also, if a vehicle has just beendriven before checking the fluidlevel, it may appear lower thannormal because fluid has traveled

out along the axle tubes and hasnot drained back to the sumparea. Therefore, a reading takenfive minutes after the vehicle hasbeen driven will appear to have alower fluid level than a vehicle thathas been stationary for an hour ortwo. Remember that the rear axleassembly must be supported to geta true reading.


1500 Series

2500 Series

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.. For the 1500 series, the proper

level is from 1.0 mm to 19.0 mm(0.04 in to 0.75 in) below thebottom of the fill plug hole,located on the rear axle. Addonly enough fluid to reach theproper level.


10-32 Vehicle Care

. For the 2500 series, the properlevel is from 0mm to 13 mm(0 in to 1/2 in) below the bottomof the fill plug hole, located atthe front of the axle. Add onlyenough fluid to reach the properlevel.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑51.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It shouldbe parked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parkingbrake. See Parking Brake onpage 9‑51.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.


Vehicle Care 10-33

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shiftto P (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

1. Pull the windshield wiper armconnector away from thewindshield.


10-34 Vehicle Care

2. Squeeze the grooved areas oneach side of the blade, and turnthe blade assembly away fromthe arm connector.

3. Install the new blade onto thearm connector and make surethe grooved areas are fully set inthe locked position.

For the proper type and size, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑9.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

1. Lift the wiper blade assembly upand out of the park rest position.

2. Pull the wiper blade assemblyaway from the backglass. Thebackglass wiper blade will notlock in a vertical position, socare should be used whenpulling it away from the vehicle.

3. Turn the wiper blade assembly,and pull it off of the wiper arm.Hold the wiper arm in positionand push the blade away fromthe wiper arm.

4. Replace the wiper blade.

5. Return the wiper blade assemblyto the park rest position.

Glass ReplacementIf the windshield or front sideglass must be replaced, see yourdealer to determine the correctreplacement glass.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual opticalheadlamp aiming system. The aimof the headlamps has been presetat the factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the aim of the headlampsmay be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their highbeams at you, this may mean thevertical aim of the headlamps needsto be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehiclebe taken to the dealer for service ifthe headlamps need to be adjusted.It is possible, however, to re-aim theheadlamps as described.

The vehicle should:. Be placed so the headlamps

are 7.6 m (25 ft) from alight‐colored wall.

. Have all four tires on a levelsurface which is level all the wayto the wall.

. Be placed so it is perpendicularto the wall.

. Not have any snow, ice, or mudon it.

. Be fully assembled and all otherwork stopped while headlampaiming is being performed.

. Be loaded with a full tank offuel and one person or 75 kg(160 lbs) sitting on thedriver seat.

. Have the tires properly inflated.

. Have the spare tire in its properlocation in the vehicle.

Headlamp aiming is done with thevehicle's low-beam headlamps.The high-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens ofthe low‐beam headlamp.

3. Record the distance from theground to the aim dot on thelow‐beam headlamp.


10-36 Vehicle Care

4. At a wall, measure from theground upward (A) to therecorded distance fromStep 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of the markin Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beamheadlamps and place a pieceof cardboard or equivalent infront of the headlamp not beingadjusted. This allows only thebeam of light from the headlampbeing adjusted to be seen on theflat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screws, which are underthe hood near each headlampassembly.

The adjustment screw can beturned with an E8 Torx® socket.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beam isaimed to the horizontal tapeline. Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise orlower the angle of the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on theleft (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrectheadlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.


Vehicle Care 10-37

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑39.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLampsIf the vehicle is a Hybrid, see theHybrid Supplement for the bulbchanging procedure.

A. Stoplamp/Taillamp

B. Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp

C. Back-up Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate(Manual) on page 2‑10 orLiftgate (Power) on page 2‑11.

2. Remove the two screws from thetaillamp assembly.

3. Pull the taillamp assemblyrearward until you disengagethe inner pins on the taillampassembly from the vehicle.


10-38 Vehicle Care

4. Press the release tab, if bulbsocket has one, and turn thebulb socket counterclockwiseto remove it from the taillampassembly.

5. Pull the old bulb straight outfrom the bulb socket.

6. Press a new bulb into the bulbsocket.

7. Reinstall the socket into thetaillamp assembly by turning thebulb socket clockwise.

8. Reinstall the taillamp assemblymaking sure to line up the pinswith the vehicle and tighten thescrews.

License Plate Lamp

1. Remove the two screws holdingeach of the license plate lampsto the molding that is part of theliftgate.

2. Twist and pull the license platelamp assembly forward throughthe molding opening.

3. Remove the bulb socket fromthe lamp assembly by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Pull the bulb straight out of thesocket and install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall the license plate lamp.


Vehicle Care 10-39

Replacement BulbsIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-up Lamp 7441

LicensePlate Lamp

W5WLL

Rear Turn SignalLamp, Taillamp,and Stoplamp

7443

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed.This greatly reduces the chance ofcircuit overload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and Other

Power Accessories

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the roadand a fuse needs to be replaced,the same amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Havethe headlamp wiring checked rightaway if the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

The wiring circuits in the vehicleare protected from short circuitsby a combination of fuses, circuitbreakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance offires caused by electrical problems.


Vehicle Care 10-41

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on theroad and don't have a spare fuse,you can borrow one that has thesame amperage. Just pick somefeature of your vehicle that you canget along without – like the radioor cigarette lighter – and use itsfuse, if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

The Engine Compartment FuseBlock is located in the enginecompartment, on the driver side ofthe vehicle. Lift the cover for accessto the fuse/relay block.


Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

To remove fuses, hold the end ofthe fuse between your thumb andindex finger and pull straight out.


10-42 Vehicle Care


Vehicle Care 10-43

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 Right TrailerStop/Turn Lamp

2

Electronic StabilitySuspension Control,Automatic Level ControlExhaust

3Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp

4 Engine Controls

5Engine Control Module,Throttle Control

6 Trailer Brake Controller

7 Front Washer

8 Oxygen Sensors

9Antilock BrakesSystem 2

10 Trailer Back-up Lamps

Fuses Usage

11 Driver Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

12Engine Control Module(Battery)

13Fuel Injectors, IgnitionCoils (Right Side)

14Transmission ControlModule (Battery)

15 Vehicle Back-up Lamps

16Passenger SideLow-Beam Headlamp

17 Air ConditioningCompressor

18 Oxygen Sensors

19Transmission Controls(Ignition)

20 Fuel Pump

21Fuel System ControlModule

22 Headlamp Washer

Fuses Usage

23 Rear Windshield Washer

24Fuel Injectors, IgnitionCoils (Left Side)

25 Trailer Park Lamps

26 Driver Side Park Lamps

27Passenger Side ParkLamps

28 Fog Lamps

29 Horn

30Passenger SideHigh-Beam Headlamp

31 Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) (If Equipped)

32Driver Side High-BeamHeadlamp

33Daytime RunningLamps 2 (If Equipped)

34 Sunroof

35Key Ignition System,Theft Deterrent System


10-44 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

36 Windshield Wiper

37SEO B2 Upfitter Usage(Battery)

38Electric AdjustablePedals

39Climate Controls(Battery)

40 Airbag System (Ignition)

41 Amplifier

42 Audio System

43Miscellaneous (Ignition),Cruise Control

44 Liftgate Release

45 Airbag System (Battery)

46 Instrument Panel Cluster

47 Not Used

Fuses Usage

48 Auxiliary Climate Control(Ignition)

49Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)

50 Rear Defogger

51 Heated Mirrors

52SEO B1 Upfitter Usage(Battery)

53Cigarette Lighter,Auxiliary Power Outlet

54Automatic Level ControlCompressor Relay

55Climate Controls(Ignition)

56Engine Control Module,Secondary Fuel Pump(Ignition)

J-CaseFuses

Usage

57 Cooling Fan 1

58Automatic Level ControlCompressor

59Heavy Duty AntilockBraking System

60 Cooling Fan 2

61 Antilock Brake System 1

62 Starter

63 Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes)

64Left Bussed ElectricalCenter 1

65 Electric Running Boards

66Heated WindshieldWasher System

67 Transfer Case


Vehicle Care 10-45

J-CaseFuses

Usage

68Stud 1 (Trailer ConnectorBattery Power)

69Mid-Bussed ElectricalCenter 1

70 Climate Control Blower

71 Power Liftgate Module

72Left Bussed ElectricalCenter 2

Relays Usage

FAN HICooling Fan HighSpeed

FAN LOCooling Fan LowSpeed

FANCNTRL Cooling Fan Control

Relays Usage

HDLPLO/HID

Low-Beam Headlamp

FOGLAMP

Front Fog Lamps

A/CCMPRSR

Air ConditioningCompressor

STRTR Starter

PWR/TRN Powertrain

FUELPMP

Fuel Pump

PRKLAMP

Parking Lamps

REARDEFOG

Rear Defogger

RUN/CRNK Switched Power

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is located on the driverside edge of the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


10-46 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 Rear Seats

2Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

Fuses Usage

3Steering WheelControls Backlight

4 Driver Door Module

5Dome Lamps, DriverSide Turn Signal

Fuses Usage

6 Driver Side TurnSignal, Stoplamp

7Instrument PanelBack Lighting

8Passenger Side TurnSignal, Stoplamp

9Passenger DoorModule, Driver Unlock

10Power Door Lock 2(Unlock Feature)

11Power Door Lock 2(Lock Feature)

12Stoplamps, CenterHigh‐ MountedStoplamp

13 Rear Climate Controls

14 Power Mirror

15Body ControlModule (BCM)

16Accessory PowerOutlets


Vehicle Care 10-47

Fuses Usage

17 Interior Lamps

18Power Door Lock 1(Unlock Feature)

19Rear SeatEntertainment

20Ultrasonic RearParking Assist, PowerLiftgate

21Power Door Lock 1(Lock Feature)

22Driver InformationCenter (DIC)

23 Rear Wiper

24 Cooled Seats

25Driver Seat Module,Remote Keyless EntrySystem

26Driver Power DoorLock (Unlock Feature)

CircuitBreaker

Usage

LT DRDriver Side PowerWindow CircuitBreaker

HarnessConnector Usage

LT DRDriver DoorHarnessConnection

BODY Harness Connector

BODY Harness Connector

Center Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The center instrument panel fuseblock is located underneath theinstrument panel, to the left of thesteering column.

Top View


BODY 2Body HarnessConnector 2




10-48 Vehicle Care


HEADLINER 3HeadlinerHarnessConnector 3



SEO/UPFITTER

SpecialEquipment OptionUpfitter HarnessConnector

CircuitBreaker Usage

CB1Passenger SidePower Window CircuitBreaker

CB2Passenger SeatCircuit Breaker

CB3Driver Seat CircuitBreaker

CB4 Rear Sliding Window

Wheels and Tires

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Ifyou ever have questions aboutyour tire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details. Foradditional information refer tothe tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑23.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-49

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can causea crash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces suchas snow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

20‐Inch Tires

If your vehicle has the optional20‐inch P275/55R20 sizetires, they are classifiedas touring tires and aredesigned for on road use.

The low‐profile, wide treaddesign is not recommendedfor off‐road driving. SeeOff-Road Driving on page 9‑7,for additional information.

Notice: If the vehicle haslow‐profile tires, they are moresusceptible to damage fromroad hazards or curb impactthan standard profile tires.Tire and/or wheel assemblydamage can occur whencoming into contact withroad hazards like, potholes,or sharp edged objects,or when sliding into a curb.The vehicle warranty doesnot cover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correctinflation pressure and, whenpossible avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and otherroad hazards.


10-50 Vehicle Care

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tireis molded into the sidewall.The following illustrations areexamples of a typical P‐Metricand a LT‐Metric tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizecode is a combination of lettersand numbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT code are theTire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are requiredto grade tires based onthree performance factors:treadwear, traction, andtemperature resistance. Formore information, see UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑66.


Vehicle Care 10-51

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure neededto support that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10‑56 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑23.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizecode is a combination of lettersand numbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,

aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load:Maximum load that can becarried and the maximumpressure needed to supportthat load when used in a dualconfiguration. For information onrecommended tire pressure seeTire Pressure on page 10‑56and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23.

(D) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(E) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). TheTIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and datethe tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date ofmanufacture.

(F) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.


10-52 Vehicle Care

(G) Single Tire MaximumLoad: Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used as a single. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10‑56 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑23.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following examples showthe different parts of a tire size.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character in

the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the tire illustration,it would mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as highas it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or

bias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire

(A) Light Truck (LT‐Metric)Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizingsystem. The letters LT as thefirst two characters in the tire


Vehicle Care 10-53

size means a light truck tireengineered to standards setby the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shownin item C of the light truck(LT‐Metric) tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as highas it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal orbias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Load Range: Load Range.

(G) Service Description: Theservice description indicates theload index and speed rating of atire. If two numbers are given asin the example, 120/116, thenthis represents the load index forsingle versus dual wheel usage(single/dual). The speed ratingis the maximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amountof air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories are,automatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.


10-54 Vehicle Care

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑56.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel,oil, and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑23.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.


Vehicle Care 10-55

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑23.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑56 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tirethat comes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑63.


10-56 Vehicle Care

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑66.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑23.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑23.

Tire PressureIf the vehicle is a hybrid, seethe hybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Tires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, ortires that do not haveenough air, can result in:. Tire overloading andover-heating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tiresthat have too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.


Vehicle Care 10-57

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle. Thislabel shows your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportyour vehicle's maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑23. Howyou load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more.

Do not forget to check thepressure of the spare tire.See Full-Size Spare Tire onpage 10‑87 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are underinflated. Checkthe tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label,no further adjustment isnecessary. If the pressure islow, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, releaseair by pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keepingout dirt and moisture.


10-58 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correcttire pressure, even if under‐inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or


Vehicle Care 10-59

alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑59 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry Canada


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

This vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressurein the tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommended

pressure shown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑23.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tiresare inflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed.For additional information anddetails about the DIC operationand displays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑28 and TireMessages on page 5‑45.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.


10-60 Vehicle Care

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel shows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑23, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑56.

The TPMS can warn about alow tire pressure condition butit does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑62, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑62 and Tires onpage 10‑48.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use onlythe GM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealeror included in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stayson for the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message alsodisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done ornot completed successfullyafter rotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process.See "TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑64.


Vehicle Care 10-61

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. TheTPMS sensor matching processshould also be performed afterreplacing a spare tire with a roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.The malfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,

using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.

There are two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matching processis outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.


3. Press Q and K on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter at the same time forapproximately five seconds. Thehorn sounds twice to signal thereceiver is in relearn mode andTIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the buttonto activate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passengerside front tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passengerside rear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 5. The horn soundstwo times to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.


10-62 Vehicle Care


10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionGM recommends that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 miles). SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑63 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑68.

When rotating the vehicle's tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


Vehicle Care 10-63

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and rearinflation pressures as shown onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑23.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑59.

Make certain that all wheel nutsare properly tightened. See“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑71.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures,driving speeds, vehicle loading,and road conditions influence whenyou need new tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tires may nothave treadwear indicators.


10-64 Vehicle Care

See Tire Inspection on page 10‑62and Tire Rotation on page 10‑62 foradditional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This is also true for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnot being used. Multiple conditionsaffect how fast this aging takesplace, including temperatures,loading conditions, and inflationpressure maintenance. Tires willtypically need to be replaced due towear before they may need to bereplaced due to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tiresor raise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedon the vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. If you need replacementtires, GM strongly recommends thatyou get tires with the same TPCSpec rating. This way, the vehiclewill continue to have tires thatare designed to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the originaltires.

GM's exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact theoverall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressuremonitoring performance. GM's TPCSpec number is molded onto thetire's sidewall near the tire size.If the tires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC spec number willbe followed by an MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑50 foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing tires insets of four. This is because uniformtread depth on all tires will helpkeep the vehicle performing mostlike it did when the tires were new.Replacing less than a full set of tirescan affect the braking and handlingperformance of the vehicle. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑62 andTire Rotation on page 10‑62 forinformation on proper tire rotation.


Vehicle Care 10-65

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tire couldcause injury or death. Only yourdealer or authorized tire servicecenter should mount or dismountthe tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires could cause you tolose control while driving. If youmix tires of different sizes,brands, or types (radial andbias-belted tires), the vehiclemight not handle properly, andyou could have a crash. Usingtires of different sizes, brands,or types could also causedamage to the vehicle. Be sureto use the same size, brand, andtype of tires on all wheels.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

This vehicle may have a differentsize spare than the road tires(those originally installed on thevehicle). When new, the vehicleincluded a spare tire and wheelassembly with a similar overalldiameter as the vehicle's roadtires and wheels, so it is all rightto drive on it. Because this sparewas developed for use on thevehicle, it will not affect vehiclehandling.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could fail

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

suddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace the vehicle'stires with those that do not have aTPC Spec number, make sure theyare the same size, load range,speed rating, and construction type(radial and bias‐belted tires) as thevehicle's original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system may give aninaccurate low‐pressure warningif non‐TPC Spec-rated tires areinstalled on the vehicle. Non‐TPCSpec-rated tires may give alow‐pressure warning that ishigher or lower than the properwarning level you would get withTPC Spec-rated tires. See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10‑58.


10-66 Vehicle Care

The vehicle's original equipmenttires are listed on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑23for more information about the Tireand Loading Information label andits location on the vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safetyif tires not recommended forthose wheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑64 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewallsof most passenger car tires.


Vehicle Care 10-67

The Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) systemdoes not apply to deeptread, winter-type snow tires,space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominalrim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions ona specified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature gradesare A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can causethe material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.


Vehicle Care 10-69

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems withbearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim,bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body andchassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑71 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.


10-70 Vehicle Care

Tire ChainsIf your vehicle is a Hybrid, seethe Hybrid Supplement for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

If your vehicle has P265/65R18 orP275/55R20 size tires, do not usetire chains. They can damageyour vehicle because there is notenough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause you tolose control of your vehicle andyou or others may be injured in acrash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on yourvehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Followthat manufacturer's instructions.To help avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, readjustor remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and donot spin your vehicle's wheels.

If you do find traction devices thatwill fit, install them on the reartires.

Notice: If your vehicle hasP265/70R17 size tires, use tirechains only where legal andonly when you must. Use chainsthat are the proper size for yourvehicle's tires. Install them on therear tires only.

Do not use chains on the fronttires.

Tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly andfollow the chain manufacturer'sinstructions. If you can hear thechains contacting your vehicle,stop and retighten them. If thecontact continues, slow downuntil it stops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels with chainson will damage your vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-71

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle's tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire,it is much more likely to leak outslowly. But if you should ever have ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls thevehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal andgrip the steering wheel firmly. Steerto maintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may

be very bumpy and noisy, but youcan still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road, if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may causea blowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If your vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.


10-72 Vehicle Care

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑5.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle canslip off the jack and roll over orfall on you or other people. Youand they could be badly injured oreven killed. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help preventthe vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever inP (Park).

3. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehiclewith a N (Neutral) transfer

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

case position, be sure thetransfer case is in a drivegear — not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

6. Put the wheel blocks at thefront and rear of the tirefarthest away from the onebeing changed. That wouldbe the tire on the other side,at the opposite end of thevehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment you will need tochange a flat tire is stored under thestorage tray, which is located on thedriver side trim panel (over the rearwheelhouse).


Vehicle Care 10-73

Regular Wheelbase Shown,Extended Wheelbase Similar

1. Remove the tray to access thetools by pulling up on the fingerdepression under the jacksymbol.

2. Remove the wing nut (B) used toretain the tool bag by turning itcounterclockwise.

3. Turn the knob (A) on the jackcounterclockwise to release thejack and wheel blocks from thebracket.

4. Remove the wheel blocks andthe wheel block retainer byturning the wing nut (C)counterclockwise.

The tools you will be using includethe following:

A. Jack

B. Wheel Blocks

C. Jack Handle

D. Jack Handle Extensions

E. Wheel Wrench


10-74 Vehicle Care

To access the spare tire, refer to thefollowing graphics and instructions:

A. Hoist Assembly

B. Hoist Shaft

C. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole


E. Wheel Wrench

F. Hoist Cable

G. Tire/Wheel Retainer

H. Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

I. Hoist Shaft Access Hole

J. Hoist End of Extension Tool

K. Spare Tire Lock

1. Open the hoist shaft accessdoor (C) on the bumper toaccess the spare tire lock (K).

2. To remove the spare tire lock,insert the ignition key, turn itclockwise and then pull itstraight out.

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (D) and wheelwrench (E) as shown.

4. Insert the open end of theextension (J) through the hole inthe rear bumper (I) (hoist shaftaccess hole).

Be sure the hoist end (J) of theextension (D) connects to thehoist shaft (B). The ribbedsquare end of the extension isused to lower the spare tire.


Vehicle Care 10-75

5. Turn the wheel wrench (E)counterclockwise to lower thespare tire (H) to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

If the spare tire does not lower tothe ground, the secondary latchis engaged causing the tire notto lower. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 10‑84 for moreinformation. 6. Use the wheel wrench hook that

allows you to pull the hoist cabletowards you, to assist inreaching the spare tire.

7. Tilt the tire toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toaccess the tire/wheel retainer.Separate the retainer from theguide pin by sliding the retainerup the pin while pressing downon the latch.


10-76 Vehicle Care

Once the retainer is separatedfrom the guide pin, tilt theretainer and pull it through thecenter of the wheel along withthe cable and latch.

8. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑71 for moreinformation.

2. If your vehicle has a center capthat covers the wheel fasteners,place the chisel end of the wheelwrench in the slot on the wheeland gently pry the cap out.

If the wheel has a bolt-on hubcap, loosen the plastic nut capsby turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. The plasticnut caps will be retained in thehub cap after it is removed fromthe wheel.

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel nuts. Turn thewheel wrench counterclockwiseto loosen the wheel nuts. Do notremove the wheel nuts yet.


Vehicle Care 10-77

Jacking Locations (Overall View)

A. Front Position

B. Rear Position

4. Position the jack under thevehicle as shown.

Front Position – 1500 Models

Front Position – 2500 Models

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a front tire of the vehicle, youwill need to use the jack handleand only one jack handleextension. Attach the wheelwrench to the jack handleextension. Attach the jackhandle to the jack (A). Positionthe jack on the frame behind theflat tire where the frame sectionsoverlap. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to clearthe ground.


10-78 Vehicle Care

Rear Position – 1500 Models

Rear Position – All Other Models

Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a rear tire of the vehicle,you will need to use the jackhandle (B) and both jack handleextensions (C). Attach the wheelwrench (D) to the jack handleextensions (C). Attach the jackhandle (B) to the jack (A). Usethe jacking pad provided onthe rear axle. Turn the wheelwrench (D) clockwise to raise thevehicle. Raise the vehicle farenough off the ground so thereis enough room for the spare tireto clear the ground.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

5. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

6. Take off the flat tire.


Vehicle Care 10-79

7. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑71.

8. Put the wheel nuts back on withthe rounded end of the nutstoward the wheel after mountingthe spare tire.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand.Then use the wheel wrench totighten the nuts until the wheel isheld against the hub.

10. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lowerthe vehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.


10-80 Vehicle Care

11. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence as shownby turning the wheel wrenchclockwise.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torque

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

specification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

When you reinstall the regularwheel and tire, you must alsoreinstall either the center cap orthe bolt-on hub cap, depending onwhich your vehicle has.. For center caps, line up the tab

on the center cap with the slot inthe wheel. The cap only goes inone way. Place the cap on thewheel and press until it snapsinto place.

. For bolt-on hub caps, line up theplastic nut caps with the wheelnuts and tighten clockwise byhand to get them started. Thentighten with the wheel wrenchuntil snug.


Vehicle Care 10-81

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminumwheel with a flat tire under yourvehicle for an extended periodof time or with the valve stempointing up can damage thewheel. Always stow the wheelwith the valve stem pointingdown and have the wheel/tirerepaired as soon as possible.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.Refer to the following graphics andinstructions to help you:

A. Hoist Assembly

B. Hoist Shaft

C. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole


E. Wheel Wrench

F. Hoist Cable

G. Tire/Wheel Retainer

H. Spare Tire/Flat Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

I. Hoist Shaft Access Hole

J. Hoist End of Extension Tool

K. Spare Tire Lock

1. Put the tire (H) on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down, and tothe rear.

2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle.Separate the tire/wheelretainer (G) from the guide pin.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Pull the pin through the center ofthe wheel. Tilt the retainer downthrough the center wheelopening.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (D) and wheelwrench (E) as shown.

4. Insert the open end of theextension (J) through the hole inthe rear bumper (I) (hoist shaftaccess hole).

5. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer is seatedin the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you heartwo clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot overtighten thecable.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (A), and thentry to turn (B) the tire. If the tiremoves, use the wheel wrench totighten the cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.

9. Reinstall the hoist shaft accesscover.


Vehicle Care 10-83

To store the tools, do the following:

A. Wheel Blocks

B. Tool Bag with Jack Tools

C. Retaining Bracket

D. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Bag

E. Jack

F. Wing Nut Retaining WheelBlocks

G. Jack Knob

1. Return the tools (wheel wrench,jack handle, and jack handleextensions) to the tool bag (B).

2. Assemble wheel blocks (A) andjack (E) together with thewing nut (F).

3. Position the jack (E) and wheelblocks (A) in the driver side trimpanel over the wheelhouse.

4. Turn the jack knob (G) clockwiseuntil the jack is secured tight inthe mounting bracket. Be sureto position the holes in the baseof the jack onto the pin in themounting bracket.

5. Use the retaining bracket (C) tofasten the tool bag (B) on thestud and turn the wing nut (D)clockwise to secure.

6. Return the storage tray to itsoriginal stored position.


10-84 Vehicle Care

Secondary Latch SystemThis vehicle has anunderbody-mounted tire hoistassembly equipped with asecondary latch system. It isdesigned to stop the spare tire fromsuddenly falling off your vehicle. Forthe secondary latch to work, thespare must be installed with thevalve stem pointing down. See“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools” under Tire Changing onpage 10‑72.

{ WARNING

Before beginning this procedureread all the instructions. Failure toread and follow the instructionscould damage the hoist assemblyand you and others could gethurt. Read and follow theinstructions listed next.

To release the spare tire from thesecondary latch:

1. Check under the vehicle to seeif the cable end is visible. If thecable is not visible proceed toStep 6.

2. If it is visible, first try to tightenthe cable by turning the wheelwrench clockwise until you heartwo clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot overtighten thecable.

3. Loosen the cable by turningthe wrench counterclockwisethree or four turns.

4. Repeat this procedure at leasttwo times. If the spare tirelowers to the ground, continuewith Step 5 under “Removing theSpare Tire and Tools” under TireChanging on page 10‑72.

5. If the spare does not lower, turnthe wrench counterclockwiseuntil approximately 15 cm (6 in)of cable is exposed.

6. Stand the wheel blocks on theirshortest ends, with the backsfacing each other.


Vehicle Care 10-85

7. Place the bottom edge of thejack (A) on the wheel blocks (B),separating them so that the jackis balanced securely.

8. Attach the jack handle,extension, and wheel wrench tothe jack and place it (with thewheel blocks) under the vehicletoward the front of the rearbumper.

9. Position the center lift point ofthe jack under the center of thespare tire.

10. Turn the wrench clockwise toraise the jack until it lifts theend fitting.

11. Continue raising the jack untilthe spare tire stops movingupward and is held firmly inplace. The secondary latch hasreleased and the spare tire isbalancing on the jack.


10-86 Vehicle Care

12. Lower the jack by turningthe wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keeplowering the jack until thespare tire slides off the jackor is hanging by the cable.

{ WARNING

Someone standing too closeduring the procedure could beinjured by the jack. If the sparetire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one isbehind you or on either side ofyou as you pull the jack out fromunder the spare.

13. Disconnect the jack handlefrom the jack and carefullyremove the jack. Use one handto push against the spare whilefirmly pulling the jack out fromunder the spare tire with theother hand.

If the spare tire is hangingfrom the cable, insert the hoistend of extension, and wheelwrench into the hoist shaft holein the bumper and turn thewheel wrench counterclockwiseto lower the spare the rest ofthe way.

14. Turn the wheel wrench in thehoist shaft hole in the bumperclockwise to raise the cableback up if the cable is hangingunder the vehicle.

Have the hoist assembly inspectedas soon as you can. You will notbe able to store a spare or flat tireusing the hoist assembly until it hasbeen inspected and/or replaced.

To continue changing the flat tire,see “Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” under TireChanging on page 10‑72.


Vehicle Care 10-87

Full-Size Spare TireYour vehicle, when new, had afully-inflated spare tire. A sparetire may lose air over time, so checkits inflation pressure regularly. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑56 andVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑23for information regarding proper tireinflation and loading your vehicle.For instruction on how to remove,install or store a spare tire, see“Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare” and “Storing aFlat or Spare Tire and Tools” underTire Changing on page 10‑72.

Notice: If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and the differentsize spare tire is installed on thevehicle, do not drive in four-wheeldrive until you can have your flattire repaired and/or replaced. Youcould damage the vehicle, andthe repair costs would not becovered by your warranty. Neveruse four-wheel drive when thedifferent size spare tire isinstalled on the vehicle.

Your vehicle may have a differentsize spare tire than the road tiresoriginally installed on your vehicle.This spare tire was developed foruse on your vehicle, so it is all rightto drive on it. If your vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and the differentsize spare tire is installed, keep thevehicle in two-wheel drive.

After installing the spare tire on yourvehicle, you should stop as soon aspossible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. Have thedamaged or flat road tire repaired orreplaced as soon as you can andinstalled back onto your vehicle.This way, the spare tire will beavailable in case you need it again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they willnot fit. Keep your spare tire and itswheel together. If your vehicle has aspare tire that does not match yourvehicle's original road tires andwheels in size and type, do notinclude the spare in the tire rotation.


10-88 Vehicle Care

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑28.

If the vehicle is a Hybrid, see theHybrid manual for more information.

If the vehicle's battery (or batteries)has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sureto use the following steps to do itsafely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.


Vehicle Care 10-89

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If theyare, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. Youwould not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission inN (Neutral) before setting theparking brake. If the vehicle hasa four-wheel-drive transfer casewith a N (Neutral) position, besure the transfer case is in adrive gear, not in N (Neutral).

Notice: If the radio or otheraccessories are left on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessories whenjump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off the radioand all the lamps that are notneeded. This avoids sparks andhelps save both batteries. And itcould save the radio!

4. Open the hood on theother vehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) jump startingterminal and a remotenegative (−) jump startingterminal. You should always usethese remote terminals insteadof the terminals on the battery.

If the vehicle has a remotepositive (+) terminal, it is locatedunder a red plastic cover at thepositive battery post. To uncoverthe remote positive (+) terminal,open the red plastic cover.


10-90 Vehicle Care

The remote negative (−) terminalis a stud located on the rightfront of the engine, where thenegative battery cable attaches.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation on the location of theremote positive (+) and remotenegative (−) terminals.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.


Vehicle Care 10-91

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the vehicle with the deadbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine partor to the remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to the remotenegative (−) terminal, on thevehicle with the dead battery.

10. Now start the vehicle withthe good battery and run theengine for a while.


10-92 Vehicle Care

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the bad battery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the remote positive (+)terminal cover, if the vehicle hasone, to its original position.


Vehicle Care 10-93

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should betowed with all four wheels offthe ground. Care must be takenwith vehicles that have lowground clearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑6.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingIf the vehicle has a hybrid engine,see the hybrid manual for moreinformation.

Recreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle? Besure to read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


10-94 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles andFour-Wheel Drive Vehicleswith a Single Speed AutomaticTransfer Case

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwith all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot tow the vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles andfour-wheel drive vehicles with asingle speed automatic transfercase should not be towed withall four wheels on the ground.Two-wheel-drive transmissions haveno provisions for internal lubricationwhile being towed. Four-wheeldrive vehicles with a single speedautomatic transfer case have noneutral position and will spin thetransmission when the rearwheels turn.

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicleswith a Two Speed AutomaticTransfer Case

Use the following procedure todinghy tow a four-wheel drivevehicle with a two speed automatictransfer case:

1. Position the vehicle being towedbehind the tow vehicle and shiftthe transmission to P (Park).

2. Turn the engine off and firmly setthe parking brake.

3. Securely attach the vehiclebeing towed to the tow vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-95

{ WARNING

Shifting a four-wheel-drivevehicle's transfer case intoN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). The driver or otherscould be injured. Make sure theparking brake is firmly set beforethe transfer case is shifted toN (Neutral).

4. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoNeutral” under “Four-WheelDrive” for the proper procedureto select the Neutral position forthe vehicle.

5. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.

6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand remove the key— thesteering wheel will still turn.

After towing, see “Shifting Out ofNeutral” under “Four-Wheel Drive”for the proper procedure to take thevehicle out of the Neutral position.

Dolly Towing – Front Towing(Front Wheels Off the Ground)

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles andFour-Wheel Drive Vehicleswith a Single Speed AutomaticTransfer Case

Notice: If a two-wheel drivevehicle or a four-wheel drivevehicle with a single speed

automatic transfer case is towedwith the rear wheels on theground, the transmission couldbe damaged. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Never tow the vehiclewith the rear wheels on theground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles andfour-wheel drive vehicles with asingle speed automatic transfercase should not be towed with therear wheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive transmissions haveno provisions for internal lubricationwhile being towed. Four-wheeldrive vehicles with a single speedautomatic transfer case have noneutral position and will spin thetransmission when the rearwheels turn.


10-96 Vehicle Care

To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drivevehicle or a four-wheel drivevehicle with a single speedautomatic transfer case, thevehicle must be towed with therear wheels on the dolly. See “RearTowing (Rear Wheels Off theGround)” later in this section formore information.

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicleswith a Two Speed AutomaticTransfer Case

Use the following procedure to dollytow a four-wheel drive vehicle fromthe front:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.

3. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

4. Firmly set the parking brake.

{ WARNING


5. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.


Vehicle Care 10-97

6. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoN (Neutral)” under “Four-WheelDrive”.

7. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

8. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.


After towing, see “Shifting Out ofN (Neutral)” under “Four-WheelDrive”.

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Offthe Ground)

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles andFour-Wheel Drive Vehicles with aSingle Speed AutomaticTransfer Case

Use the following procedure to dollytow the vehicle from the rear:


2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑51.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).



7. For four-wheel drive vehicleswith a single speed automatictransfer case, turn the transfercase knob to the Two-WheelHigh position.



10-98 Vehicle Care

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with aTwo Speed AutomaticTransfer Case

Use the following procedure to dollytow a four-wheel drive vehicle fromthe rear:


2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑51.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).



{ WARNING


7. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoN (Neutral)” under “Four-WheelDrive”.


After towing, see “Shifting Out ofN (Neutral)” under “Four-WheelDrive”.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may berequired. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7.

Washing the Vehicle

The best way to preserve thevehicle's finish is to keep it clean bywashing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicle


Vehicle Care 10-99

or damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight. Use a car washing soap.Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that containacid or abrasives, as they candamage the paint, metal or plasticon the vehicle. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer. Follow all manufacturers'directions regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8 274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle” in Exterior Care.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.


10-100 Vehicle Care

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To helpkeep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Washing with water is all thatis usually needed. However, chromepolish may be used on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Windshield, Backglass, andWiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldand backglass with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when you clean theblades. Bugs, road grime, sapand a buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using asoft clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a softclean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.


Vehicle Care 10-101

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chromepolish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Tires

To clean the tires, use a stiff brushwith tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's body andpaint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.


10-102 Vehicle Care

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbodywith plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas of theframe should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint jobcauses this, we will repair, at nocharge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by thisfallout condition within 12 months or20 000 km (12,000 mi) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

Interior CareThe interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Althoughnot always visible, dust and dirt canaccumulate on the upholstery. Dirtcan damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regularvacuuming is recommendedto remove particles from theupholstery. It is important to keepthe upholstery from becoming andremaining heavily soiled. Soilsshould be removed as quicklyas possible. The interior mayexperience extremes of heat thatcould cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors mayrequire more frequent cleaning.Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to homefurnishings may also transfer colorto the interior.

When cleaning the interior, onlyuse cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned.Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces forwhich they were not intended.Use glass cleaner only on glass.Remove any accidental over-sprayfrom other surfaces immediately. Toprevent over-spray, apply cleanerdirectly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage tothe rear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents thatmay become concentrated in thebreathing space. Before usingcleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label.While cleaning the interior, maintainadequate ventilation by opening thedoors and windows.


Vehicle Care 10-103

Dust may be removed from smallbuttons and knobs using a smallbrush with soft bristles.

Products that remove odors fromthe upholstery and clean the glasscan be obtained from your dealer.

Do not clean the vehicle using:. A knife or any other sharp object

to remove a soil from any interiorsurface.

. A stiff brush. It can causedamage to the interior surfaces.

. Heavy pressure or aggressiverubbing with a cleaning cloth.Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

. Laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers can leave residuethat streaks and attracts dirt. Forliquid cleaners, about 20 dropsper 3.78 L (1 gal) of water is agood guide. Use only mild,neutral-pH soaps.

. Too much cleaner that saturatesthe upholstery.

. Cleaners that contain solventscan damage the interior.

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with asoft brush attachment frequentlyto remove dust and loose dirt.A canister vacuum with a beater barin the nozzle may only be used onfloor carpet and carpeted floor mats.For any soil, always try to remove itfirst with plain water or club soda.Before cleaning, gently remove asmuch of the soil as possible usingone of the following techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to removeexcess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiledarea until the cleaning clothremains clean.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plainwater.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner orspot lifter is to be used, test a smallhidden area for colorfastness first.


10-104 Vehicle Care

If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation mayresult, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has beencompleted, a paper towel can beused to blot excess moisture fromthe fabric or carpet.

Leather

Leather, and lighter colored leatherin particular, will need more frequentcleaning to prevent the buildup ofdust, dirt, and colors transferredfrom other items so that these donot become permanent stains.

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Your dealer has a GMapproved leather cleaner availablethat provides superior cleaningperformance when used regularlyon finished automotive leathers.Allow the leather to dry naturally. Donot use heat, steam, spot lifters orspot removers, or shoe polish on

leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are soldto preserve and protect leathermay permanently change theappearance and feel of the leatherand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the interior because theycan alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl andother Plastic Surfaces

A soft cloth dampened with watermay be used to remove dust.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces.Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect soft plastic surfacesmay permanently change theappearance and feel of the interior

and are not recommended. Donot use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containingorganic solvents to clean theinterior because they can alter theappearance by increasing the glossin a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Notice: Air fresheners containsolvents that may cause damageto plastics and painted surfaces.Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions when using airfresheners in the vehicle. If airfreshener comes in contact withpaint or a plastic surface, blotimmediately with a soft cloth.Damage caused by using airfresheners would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-105

Wood Panels

Use a clean cloth moistened inwarm, soapy water (use mild dishwashing soap). Dry the woodimmediately with a clean cloth.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the acceleratorpedal and/or brake pedal.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedal.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for thevehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


10-106 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-10

General InformationNotice: Maintenanceintervals, checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary tokeep this vehicle in goodworking condition. Damagecaused by failure to followscheduled maintenance mightnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

As the vehicle owner, you areresponsible for the scheduledmaintenance in this section. Werecommend having your dealerperform these services. Propervehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑23.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Are driven off-road in therecommended manner. SeeOff-Road Driving on page 9‑7.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑68.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer tohave a qualified technician dothe work. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

At your dealer, you can be certainthat you will receive the highestlevel of service available. Yourdealer has specially trainedservice technicians, uses genuinereplacement parts, as well as,up‐to‐date tools and equipmentto ensure fast and accuratediagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑9. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performed.Tires should be rotated every12 000 km/7,500 miles. See TireRotation on page 10‑62.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Engine OilSoon Message Displays

Change engine oil and filter. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑7. AnEmission Control Service.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, service isrequired for the vehicle as soon aspossible, within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life systemmight not indicate the need forvehicle service for more than a year.The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year andthe oil life system must be reset.Your dealer has trained servicetechnicians who will performthis work and reset the system.



If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 miles sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

Every Engine Oil Change. Change engine oil and filter.

Reset oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑7 andEngine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10. An EmissionControl Service.

. Engine coolant level check. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑17.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspectionof hoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑25.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑98. Wornor damaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑33.

. Tire inflation pressures check.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑62.

. Rotate tires if necessary. SeeTire Rotation on page 10‑62.

. Fluids visual leak check (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repaired andthe fluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑15.

. Brake system inspection (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

. Steering and suspensioninspection. Visual inspectionfor damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

. Lubricate the front suspension,steering linkage, and parkingbrake cable guides. For vehiclesmainly driven in heavy citytraffic in hot weather, in hillyor mountainous terrain, whenfrequently towing a trailer,or used for taxi, police,or delivery service, lubricateevery 5 000 km/3,000 miles.Control arm ball joints on2500 series vehicles requirelubrication but should notbe lubricated unless theirtemperature is −12°C (10°F)or higher, or they could bedamaged. Control arm balljoints on 1500 series vehiclesare maintenance‐free.



. Body hinges and latches, keylock cylinders, folding seathardware, and liftgate hinges,linkage, and handle pivot pointslubrication. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑7. More frequentlubrication may be requiredwhen the vehicle is exposed to acorrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth makes themlast longer, seal better, and notstick or squeak.

. Restraint system componentscheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑37.

. Fuel system inspection fordamage or leaks.

. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

Additional Required Services

Every 12 000 km/7,500Miles. Rotate tires. Tires should

be rotated every 12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire Rotationon page 10‑62.

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑7.. Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 10‑17.. Windshield washer fluid level

check. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑25.

Once a Month. Tire inflation pressures check.

See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑62.

. Sunroof track and sealinspection, if equipped.See Sunroof on page 2‑23.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 10‑32.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck on page 10‑32.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑33.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 10‑33.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Underbody flushing service.

. Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/LiftglassSupport Gas Strut Service:Visually inspect gas strut,if equipped, for signs of wear,cracks, or other damage. Checkthe hold open ability of the gasstrut. Contact your dealer ifservice is required.



First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑15.

. Automatic transmission fluidchange (severe service) forvehicles mainly driven inheavy city traffic in hot weather,in hilly or mountainous terrain,when frequently towing atrailer, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. SeeAutomatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑12.

. Four‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (severeservice) for vehicles mainlydriven when frequently towinga trailer, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. Checkvent hose at transfer case forkinks and proper installation.Check to be sure vent hose isunobstructed, clear, and free ofdebris. During any maintenance,if a power washer is used toclean mud and dirt from theunderbody, care should be takento not directly spray the transfercase output seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.

. Evaporative control systeminspection. Check all fuel andvapor lines and hoses for properhook‐up, routing, and condition.Check that the purge valve,if the vehicle has one, worksproperly. Replace as needed.An Emission Control Service.The U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Boardhas determined that the failureto perform this maintenanceitem will not nullify the emissionwarranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of thevehicle's useful life. We,however, urge that allrecommended maintenanceservices be performed at theindicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.



First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service). SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑12.

. Four‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (normalservice). Check vent hose attransfer case for kinks andproper installation. Checkto be sure vent hose isunobstructed, clear, and free ofdebris. During any maintenance,

if a power washer is used toclean mud and dirt from theunderbody, care should betaken to not directly spray thetransfer case output seals.High pressure water canovercome the seals andcontaminate the transfer casefluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

. Spark plug replacement andspark plug wires inspection.An Emission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill (or everyfive years, whichever occursfirst). See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑17. An EmissionControl Service.

. Engine drive belts inspectionfor fraying, excessive cracks,or obvious damage (or every10 years, whichever occursfirst). Replace, if needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification. Oilsmeeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certificationmark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexoscertification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑17.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, inCanada 89021320).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Chassis LubricationChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Front Axle (1500 Series Vehicles withFour-Wheel Drive)

SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021671, inCanada 89021672).

Front Axle (2500 Series Vehicles withFour-Wheel Drive)

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Rear AxleSAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Transfer Case (Four‐Wheel Drive) DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Front Axle Propshaft Spline orOne-Piece Propshaft Spline

(Two-Wheel Drive with Auto. Trans.)

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345879, inCanada 10953511).

Hood HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot PointsMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Weatherstrip SqueaksSynthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Standard Filter 15908916* A3086C*

High Capacity Filter 15908915 A3085C

Oil Filter 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs 12621258 41-110

Wiper Blades

Front – 55.0 cm (21.6 in) 25877402 —

Rear – 30.0 cm (11.8 in) 25820122 —

*15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



Maintenance Record (cont.)

Date OdometerReading




Maintenance Record (cont.)

Date OdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsIf your vehicle is a Hybrid, see the Hybrid manual for more information.

The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

5.3L V8 17.3 L 18.3 qt

6.0L V8 2500 Series 16.5 L 17.4 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L† 6.0 qt†

Fuel Tank

Regular 98.4 L 26.0 gal

Extended 1500 Series 119.2 L 31.5 gal

Extended 2500 Series 147.6 L 39.0 gal


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)

6L80-E Transmission 5.7 L 6.0 qt

6L90-E Transmission 6.0 L 6.3 qt

Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

5.3L V8 FlexFuel with ActiveFuel Management™ (IronBlock)

0 Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)

5.3L V8 FlexFuel with ActiveFuel Management™ (AluminumBlock)

3 Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)

6.0L V8 with Active FuelManagement™ (Iron Block)

G Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing



Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-15OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-16Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at thatlevel. If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannotbe resolved by the dealershipwithout further help, in the U.S.,call 1-800-462-8782, CustomerAssistance prompt. In Canada,call General Motors of CanadaCustomer Communication at1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). This is available from thevehicle registration or title, orthe plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility.That is why we suggest followingStep One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and the dealerare committed to making sure youare completely satisfied with thenew vehicle. However, if youcontinue to remain unsatisfied afterfollowing the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, you can filewith the Better Business Bureau(BBB) Auto Line® Program toenforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofilling out a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree withthe decision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be awareof its participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors CustomerCommunication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-800-462-8583 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-462-8782

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

Front U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico andU.S. Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. deR.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0801Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0801

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who aredeaf, hard of hearing, or speechimpaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), GMC hasTTY equipment available at itsCustomer Assistance Center. AnyTTY user can communicate withGMC by dialing: 1-800-462-8583.TTY users in Canada can dial1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

GMC Owner Center (U.S.)www.gmcownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.. Storage for online service and

maintenance records.. GMC dealer locator for service

nationwide.. Exclusive privileges and offers.. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle.. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries.



Other Helpful Links

GMC — www.gmc.com

GMC Merchandise —www.gmccollection.com

Help Center —www.gmc.com/helpcenter. FAQ (Frequently Asked

Questions). Contact Us

My GM Canada www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuabletools and services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quicklinks to parts and serviceestimates, check trade-invalues, or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.casection within www.gm.ca.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.



General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1‐800‐462‐8782; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. GMC and General Motorsof Canada Limited reserve the rightto make any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the rightto limit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlockmay be available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before thisservice is given.



. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was ina crash and cannot be driven.Assistance is also given whenthe vehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America whenrequested either with themost direct route or the mostscenic route. Additional travelinformation is also available.Allow three weeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expensesmay be reimbursed during the5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi)Powertrain warranty period.Items considered are hotel,meals, and rental car.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian‐Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Limit ofsix requests per year.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometres from whereyour trip was started toqualify. General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.



. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor maygive permission to get localemergency road service.You will receive payment, up to$100, after sending the originalreceipt to Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requireswarranty service, contact the dealerand request an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, thedealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot bescheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keepdriving it until it can be scheduledfor service, unless, of course, theproblem is safety related. If it is,please call the dealership, let themknow this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid‐specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generallybe completed while you wait.However, if you are unableto wait, GM helps to minimizeinconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Dependingon the circumstances, the dealercan offer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers mayprovide shuttle service to get you



to your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule.This includes one‐way or round‐tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters of thedealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used insteadof the dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can onlybe up to the maximum amountallowed by GM for shuttle service.In addition, for U.S. customers,should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by originalreceipts. See the dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

The dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and mayinclude minimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such asshuttle service, may not be availableat every dealer. Please contactthe dealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify,change, or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.



Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged,have the damage repaired by aqualified technician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts arenew parts made with the samematerials and construction methodsas the parts with which the vehiclewas originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts arealso available. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.

As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. The dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.



Insuring The Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure thatthe vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collisionparts. If such insurance coverageis not available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or

Genuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑6.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.

. Vehicle license plate number.

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑45.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.



Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be coveredby the GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you maybe obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.

In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choicesas long as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have thediagnosis and repair informationon the engines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The Owner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.



Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtainother information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.



Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. Callthem at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help the dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs ormay be made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.



OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash‐like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar glove box kit, atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data andfor deletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link withany other GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-35Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94

Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94

Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-15Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44

Airbag System (cont.)What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-45

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-41AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-19Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7AntennaRear Side Window . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-45

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19

Audio SystemRadio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-3

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-37Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

AuxiliaryRoof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6


i-2 INDEX

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-33Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47BrakePedal and AdjustableThrottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28

Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-23Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-38Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-69Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-63Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 2-11Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70ChargingSystem Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-33

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-62

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-69, 3-72, 3-73Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40


INDEX i-3

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Continuous DampingControl (CDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

CoverCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-12

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-15Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-75

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-19If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-22Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28


i-4 INDEX

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

DVDRear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35

DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Engine (cont.)Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Cooling System Messages . . .5-40Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-15Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-36Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-15Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-37Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

FeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-105FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-12Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . .9-43, 9-48

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Four-WheelDrive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43, 9-48, 10-29

Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30


INDEX i-5

Front Fog LampsLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . .3-10

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-70Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-69Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-69Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-27Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-35Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68Requirements, California . . . . .9-69System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42

Fuel EconomyDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-87

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-55Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-15Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-27High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10


i-6 INDEX

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-19Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-42Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-50Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42LampsAuxiliary RoofMounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-21Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-69

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

Level ControlAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . 2-10, 2-11

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-23Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-26Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont.)Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-17Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-25Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-27Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . .9-43, 9-48

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-21Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-45Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-40Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42

Messages (cont.)Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Object Detection System . . . . .5-42Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-43Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58


i-8 INDEX

NNavigationVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Object Detection, Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-54

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-33

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-35Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-47

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-33Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3


INDEX i-9

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55

Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-45

Rear SeatsHeated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Rear Side Window Antenna . . . 7-13Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-63Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5

Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5ReplacementGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-53Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36


i-10 INDEX

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-38Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-36

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-37Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated and VentilatedFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Seats (cont.)Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-6Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-84Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . 3-69, 3-72, 3-73

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-10Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

Side Blind Zone Alert . . . . . . . . . . 9-60Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-25StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-32Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

StepsPower Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14


INDEX i-11

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-16Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-59Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-58Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Secondary Latch System . . . 10-84Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Tires (cont.)Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-68When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-75Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-84General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-74Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-93Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-79Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93

TrailerTow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43, 9-48TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8


i-12 INDEX

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-58Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-55Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-61Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55

Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-46

Vehicle (cont.)Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Vehicle IdentificationService Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Warning Lights, Gauges,and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-47

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-60Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-33WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Documents

2011 GMC Yukon/Yukon XL Owner Manual€¦ · GMC Yukon/Yukon XL Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (4,1) iv Introduction Using this Manual To quickly locate information about the vehicle,